EST3 Installation Sheets-2

EST3
Installation Sheets
P/N 3100051 • Rev 5.0 • 23MAR05

DEVELOPED BY Edwards Systems Technology
8985 Town Center Parkway
Bradenton FL 34202
(941) 739-4200
COPYRIGHT NOTICE Copyright © 2000–2005. All rights reserved.
This manual and the products it describes are copyrighted by
Edwards Systems Technology, Inc. (EST). You may not
reproduce, translate, transcribe, or transmit any part of this
manual without express, written permission from EST.
This manual contains proprietary information intended for
distribution to authorized persons or companies for the sole
purpose of conducting business with EST. If you distribute any
information contained in this manual to unauthorized persons,
you have violated all distributor agreements and we may take
legal action.
TRADEMARKS Microsoft, Microsoft Mouse, and Windows are all trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
CREDITS This manual was designed and written by the EST Technical
Services - Documentation Department, Sarasota.
DOCUMENT HISTORY
Date Revision Reason for change
27APR00 1.0 Initial release
30AUG01 2.0 Add GFD, MODCOM, and 3-NSHM(1) installation sheets.
01NOV01 3.0 Add 24DC12, 3-SAC, ATCK, CRC, CRCRL, CRCSND, KPDISP,
SIGA-MD, and SIGA-SEC installation sheets.
11DEC01 4.0 Correct titles in Content to match installation sheet titles
23MAR05 5.0 Revised to match current set of installation sheets
Content
Installation sheet title P/N

24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface 3100284
3-AADC1 and 3-AADC1-MB Addressable Analog Driver Controller 3100585
3-ANNCPU1 Annunciator Controller Module 387464
3-ANNCPU3 Annunciator Controller Module 3100650
3-ANNSM Annunciator Support Module 387312
3-ASU and 3-ASU/4 Audio Source Unit 270482
3-ASU/FT Audio Source Unit with Firefighter's Telephone (3-FTCU) 270481
3-ATPINT ATP Interface 387284
3-BATBKT Battery Bracket 387556
3-BATS Battery Shelf 387338
3-BTSEN Battery Distribution Bus 387337
3-BTSEN-E Battery Distribution Bus 3100030
3-CAB Series Equipment Enclosure Backboxes 387557
3-CAB Series Equipment Enclosure Doors 270488
3-CAB5 / 3-CAB5R 270487
3-CAB-E Series Equipment Enclosure Doors 387549
3-CHAS7 Seven Local Rail Module Chassis 270484
3-CPU1 Central Processor Module 387465
3-CPU3 Central Processor Module 3100648
3-FIB(A) Fiber Optic Communications Interface 387333
3-FIBMB Fiber-optic Interface 3100509
3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module 270492
3-LCD Main LCD Display 3100586
3-LCDXL Main LCD Display 3100707
3-LDSM LED Display Support Local Rail Module 270485
3-MODCOM, 3-MODCOMP Modem Communicator 387476
3-NSHM1(2) Network Short Haul Modem 387596
3-OPS Off Premise Signal Module 270494
3-RCC Series Remote Closet Cabinets 270486
3-RCC-E Series Remote Closet Cabinets 387551
3-REMICA Remote Microphone 387466
EST3 Installation Sheets i

Content
Installation sheet title P/N

3-REMICP Remote Microphone 387519
3-RLCM/D, 3-6ANN/D, 3-10ANN/D Remote Annunciator Equipment Enclosure 387310
Doors
3-RLCM/D-E, 3-6ANN/D-E, 3-10ANN/D-E Remote Annunciator Equipment 387553
Enclosure Doors
3-RS485(A/B/R) and 3-RS232 Option Cards 270489
3-SAC Security Access Control Module 387624
3-TAMP(5) and 3-TAMPRCC Tamper Switches 387422
3-ZA20A, 3-ZA20B, 3-ZA40A, 3-ZA40B Zoned Audio Amplifiers 387463
3-ZA90 Zoned Audio Amplifier 387516
3-ZA95 Zoned Audio Amplifier 3100765
6ANN and 10ANN Series Remote Annunciator Wallboxes 387586
ATCK Attack Kit for RCC7R Cabinet 3100142
CDR-3 Bell Coder 3100023
Control/LED Displays 270493
CR-5355 Proximity Reader 3100113
CRC and CRCXM Card Reader Controller 387625
CRCRL Accessory Relay 3100294
CRCSND Sounder 3100033
GFD Ground Fault Detector 387630
IOP3A Isolator RS-232 Card 270758
KPDISP Keypad Display 3100054
NETCOM-16D Mulitport Device Server 3100573
NETCOM-1F Device Server 3100572
NETCOM-1S Device Server 3100571
NETCOM-BRKT Mounting Bracket 3100575
NETSW-EIS6-MM and NETSW-EIS6-SM Switching Hub 3100574
Power Supplies 270495
Power Supplies (E Series) 387555
RACCR Wallbox 387578
RLCM/B(-S) Remote Annunciator Wallboxes 387559
Signature Controller Module and Signature Data Circuit Card 3100584
ii EST3 Installation Sheets

Content
Introduction
About this manual

This manual contains copies of the EST3 installation sheets. The
sheets are arranged in alphabetical order by title. The part
number listed in Content is the installation sheet part number.
The EST3 library

A library of documents and multi-media presentations supports
the EST3 life safety system. A brief description of each is
provided below.
EST3 Installation and Service Manual (P/N 270380): Provides
complete information on how to install and service the EST3
hardware. The manual also includes installation information on
selected Signature Series components.
EST3 Installation Sheets (P/N 3100051): Is a convenient package
of all EST3 component installation sheets. This manual shows
you the jumper settings and terminal connections for each
component.
SDU Online Help (P/N 180653): Provides full online support for
configuring and programming a system using the EST3 System
Definition Utility program.
EST3 System Operation Manual (P/N 270382): Provides detailed
information on how to operate the system and system
components.
EST3 International Installation Supplement Manual (P/N
270925): Provides information specific to systems installed
outside the United States and Canada.
EST3 Smoke Management Application Manual (P/N 270913):
Provides information for designing, programming, and testing an
EST3 smoke control system.
EST3 Users Self-Study Course (P/N 270684): Contains a self-
paced manual and accompanying video. The course is designed
for building personal, security guards, firefighters, and other
individuals that may be required to operate the system.
Other documents
In addition to documents in the EST3 library, you may find the
following documents useful.
Signature Series Intelligent Smoke and Heat Detectors
Applications Bulletin (P/N 270145): This manual provides
EST3 Installation Sheets iii

Content
additional applications information on the Signature series

smoke and heat detector applications.
Signature Series Component Installation Manual (P/N 270497):
This manual provides detailed mounting and wiring information
for all Signature series devices.
Speaker Application Guide (P/N 85000-0033): This manual
provides information on the placement and layout of speakers for
fire alarm signaling and emergency voice communications.
Strobe Applications Guide (P/N 85000-0049): This manual
provides information on the placement and layout of strobes for
fire alarm signaling.
iv EST3 Installation Sheets

24DC12
12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface
Product description Installation instructions

To install the 24DC12:
1. Make wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagrams.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 2. Mount the 24DC12 to a SIGA-MP series mounting plate in
+ + an EST3 enclosure.
EOLR 4.7K EOLR
3. Install a tamper switch to the EST3 enclosure.
24 Vdc Relay
OUT IN NC C C NO Note: If you are using the 24DC12 to power a Grade A bell, it
+ + must be installed in the ATCK attack enclosure. The ATCK
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
must be equipped with the 3-TAMPRCC tamper switch.
Wiring diagrams
Connection to 12 Vdc powered devices
The 24DC12 module provides two basic functions. First, it
reduces a 24 Vdc input to 12 Vdc for a Grade A local burglar
alarm bell or a 12 Vdc security/access device such as dual + To 12 Vdc
NAC input - security device
tech motion detectors or a stacked photoelectric beam.
Second, it ground isolates the system initiating device circuit From +
from the outer enclosure of the Grade A local burglar alarm 24 Vdc -
[1] C
bell, which is usually connected to earth ground.
EOLR
- + NO
The 24DC12 is also listed for fire applications such as
powering 12 Vdc accessory devices, relays, etc. NC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
The 24DC12 provides up to one amp of 12 Vdc to security
devices. 24DC12 OPTIONAL: Loop
connection if security
device is not ground
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Specifications isolated.
Housing: White, high impact polymer

To security alarm
Power input ratings (T6-T5) Power input EOLR initiating device
[1]
Voltage: 21 to 26 Vdc From + circuit
Current: 20 mA 24 Vdc -
NAC input ratings (T13-T14)
Voltage: 21 to 26 Vdc
Current (1.0 A @ 12 Vdc): 0.7 A Connection to Grade A local bell
Current (0.5 A @ 12 Vdc): 0.35 A
12 Vdc output rating (T11-T12)
Must be in rigid conduit or electrical
Voltage: 12 Vdc metallic tubing. If flexible conduit is used, Grade A local bell
Current: 1.0 A @ 0.6 power factor it must be entirely concealed within the (Ademco Model AB12M
Relay (T1-T4) walls or above the ceiling of the premises. or equivalent)
Voltage: 24 Vdc
From notification 1+ 12V
Current: 1.0 A (resistive) output on IDC8/4 2- Bell
Wire size: 12 to 22 AWG (2.5 to 0.25 sq mm) Tamper
3
NAC + switches
Mounting: Mount in an EST3 control panel enclosure using a 4
NAC - 5 Outer
SIGA-MP series mounting plate. The enclosure must be EOLR
4.7K
housing
NAC input [1] EOL 6
equipped with a tamper switch. If you are using it to power - +
a Grade A bell, it must be mounted in the ATCK attack Inner
enclosure with the 3-TAMPRCC tamper switch. 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 housing
Operating environment
Temperature: 32 °F (0 °C) to 120 °F (49 °C) 24DC12
Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing
Device support 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Bell: 1
Power input
Tamper switches: 1 alarm housing - inner and outer To tamper initiating
+
housing 24 Vdc IN
-
EOLR device circuit
Access control: Models 339-E1, 681-B1, 875-E1 - 24 Vdc OUT (IDC8/4 input,
[1] SIGA-SEC2)
manufactured by Edwards or equivalent manufacturer + to next device
[1] From listed power limited source.
Installation Sheet 26OCT01 P/N: 3100284 REV: 1.0

24DC12 - 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface 1/1
3-AADC1 and 3-AADC1-MB
Addressable Analog Driver Controller
Product description Specifications

Installation: 1 LRM space on rail chassis
Module configuration: 1 addressable analog circuit
Wire size:
B B
LOOP1
S
H
A A
LOOP1
N/C B B
LOOP1
N/C
12 AWG (1.5 sq mm) maximum
Line interface module 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) minimum
Termination: Removable plug-in terminal strip on module
Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
OUTPUT MODULE
Circuit configuration
Class B (Style 4)
Class A (Style 6)
Circuit capacity: 99 addressable analog sensors and 99
addressable analog modules
Circuit resistance: 50 W, max.
Circuit capacitance: 0.5 mF, max.
Standby current: 175 mA (includes full loop of devices)
Controller module
Alarm current: 205 mA (includes full loop of devices)
Isolators: Maximum of 6 isolators. Maximum of 25 devices
between isolators.
Installation instructions
The Addressable Analog Driver Controller (AADC) module 1. Connect the LIM card to CIRCUIT 1 on the backside of the
provides one Class A or Class B loop. The loop can contain up rail module assembly. See Figure 1.
to 99 addressable analog sensors and 99 addressable analog
modules. 2. If a control/display module is required, install it at this time.
Refer to the instructions provided with the control/display
The module requires one space on the rail chassis and is module.
secured to the rail assembly using snap rivet fasteners. The
module features a hinged front panel for mounting displays or 3. Install the module on the rail.
a blank protective faceplate.
4. Before connecting the field wiring, test the field wiring for
All field wiring connections to the AADC are made via plug-in opens or shorts.
connectors that permit termination of field wiring without the
When a circuit checks out properly, connect it to the
module being installed in the enclosure. The plug-in
appropriate terminals as shown in Figure 2. Polarity is
connectors and snap rivet mounting also facilitate rapid
indicated for normal monitoring of the circuit's electrical
troubleshooting without the use of tools.
integrity.
Warnings
This product contains components that are sensitive to static
electricity. Failure to follow proper handling procedures may
result in equipment damage.
Rail modules may not be plugged into the rail chassis
assembly while voltages are present on the rail. Failure to de-
energize the panel before plugging in the rail module may
Installation Sheet 24JUL03 P/N: 3100585 REV: 1.0

3-AADC1 and 3-AADC1-MB - Addressable Analog Driver Controller 1/2
CIRCUIT 2
CIRCUIT 1
Snap rivet installation
Figure 1: LIM card installation
Wiring diagram
[2] Required for Class A only
B B S A A N/C B B N/C
H
LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1
Circuit 1
3-AADC1
Notes
1. All wiring supervised and power-limited
[2] Shield, if used, must be continuous and
free from earth ground
Figure 2: Wiring the AADC
P/N: 3100585 REV: 1.0 24JUL03 Installation Sheet

2/2 3-AADC1 and 3-AADC1-MB - Addressable Analog Driver Controller
PRODUCT INFORMATION CENTRAL PROCESSOR WIRING
Ground Lead
The 3-ANNCPU1 Annunciator Controller module is the P/N 250163
control element for all the LCD and LED/Switch displays To Backbox
in an enclosure. The 3-ANNCPU1 processes all control

information from switches on the displays installed within
EARTH GROUND
NETWORK B
NETWORK A
the cabinet as well as processing the data received from
the network for display. The 3-ANNCPU1 contains 1MB
24 VDC
SPARE
of RAM.
24 VDC
An internal calendar and clock with leap year function 4 Ferrite Clamp
provides date/time event stamping and initiates timed (supplied)
events. The controller automatically identifies and 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
supervises all modules installed in the annunciator, and

has an integral watchdog to identify both hardware and To TB1 on 3-ANNCPU1 5
NOTES:
software faults. 1. All wiring, except earth ground,
is supervised.
The 3-ANNCPU1 communicates with other 3- 2. All wiring is power-limited.
ANNCPU1s and 3-CPU1 Central Processors on the
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
3. 24 VDC available from Primary
or Booster Power supply.
network over a Class A or B RS-485 network data 4. Install ferrite clamp around
circuit. The controller functions as the local bus master 24VDC power wiring, close to
and supervises all bus traffic between modules in the the enclosure wall.
5. Make sure daughter board
cabinet. connections are secure and
were not loosened during
The 3-ANNCPU1 module requires two spaces at the left- shipment.
most position of the enclosure. The controller is secured
to the inner door by two retainer brackets. All field wiring
connections to the 3-ANNCPU1 module are made via a
plug-in connector, permitting termination of field wiring
without the equipment installed in the enclosure. All
external connections are power- limited and transient 3-ANNCPU1
protected. The plug-in connector facilitates rapid remove
and replace troubleshooting without the use of tools.
Note: 3-CPU Boot and Application Code must be
version 1.33 or greater. J5
SPECIFICATIONS
RX1
Space Required 2 spaces in enclosure TX1
RX2
Display (optional) 3-LCD Display mounts on front TX2
RX3
TX3
Message Capacity
Message Queue 500 Events per queue
Event History Log 1,000 to 1,700 Events, depending
on event type To 3-LCD
J1
Network Com Port
RS-485 Isolated, Class B or Class A
Max. length 5,000 ft (1,524 m)
between any three panels
Max.Resistance 90 !
Max.Capacitance 0.3 "F
Wiring type 1 twisted pair, 18 AWG
2
(0.75 mm ) min.
2
12 AWG (2.5 mm ) max.
INSTALLATION SHEET:
Power Requirements
Voltage 24 Vdc 3-ANNCPU1
Standby Current 171 mA @ 24 Vdc Annunciator Controller Module
Alarm Current 195 mA @ 24 Vdc INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387464 FILE NAME: 387464.CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: SM
Termination Plug-in terminal strip
DATE: 05/05/98 CREATED BY: GS
Operating Environment GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
Temperature 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49°C) A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East

Humidity 93% RH, non-condensing GS BUILDING SYSTEMS
CORPORATION Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, ON, Canada
INSTALLATION
To install in remote annunciator cabinet enclosure: Observe static sensitive
1. Remove the top module retainer bracket (see figure below). material handling practices.
2. Loosen the bottom module retainer bracket.
3. Insert the bottom of the 3-ANNCPU1 into the bottom module retainer bracket.
4. Tilt the 3-ANNCPU1 forward until the top touches the inner door.
5. Tighten the bottom module retainer bracket.
6. Secure the top module retainer bracket to the inner door.
7. Connect cable assembly from P3 on the 3-ANNCPU1 to J2 on the adjacent annunciator strip.
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
3-ANNCPU1
J3 J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 P3
To install in 3-EVPWRA:
1. Remove one module retainer bracket and loosen the other (see figure below).
2. Connect cable assembly 360136 (supplied with 3-EVPWRA) to J5 on the 3-ANNCPU1.
3. Remove the 4 locking tabs on the 3-ANNCPU1.
4. Place the 3-ANNCPU1 between the module retainer brackets.
5. Tighten module retainer brackets on both ends.
6. Connect cable assembly 360136 to 3-EVPWR connector J6.
7. Connect cable assembly 46050-1878 (supplied with 3-EVPWRA) from P3 on the 3-ANNCPU1 to P1 on the 3-EVPWR.
J5 3-ANNCPU1
TB1
10 B-
360136
9 B+
8 A-
7 A+
5 GND
4 +24V
3 GND
2 +24V
1 EGND
P3
3-EVPWRA
24V + - + -
J6
J5
P1 J2
A IN
46050-1878
3-ANNCPU3
Annunciator Controller Module

Display (optional): 3-LCD Display mounts on front
Message capacity
Message queue: 2,000 events
Event history log: 1,000 events
Network
RS-485: isolated, Class B or Class A max. length 5,000 ft
(1,524 m) between any three panels
Max. resistance: 90 W
Max. capacitance: 0.3 mF
Wiring type: 1 twisted pair, 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) min., or
12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) max.
Compatible 3-CPUs: 3-CPU, 3-CPU1, and 3-CPU3
Compatible 3-ANNCPUs: 3-ANNCPU, 3-ANNCPU1, and
3-ANNCPU3
Power requirements
Voltage: 24 Vdc
Standby current: 120 mA
Alarm current: 140 mA
Termination: Plug-in terminal strip
Humidity 93% RH, noncondensing
Required software: 3-CPU Boot and Application code must be
version 1.33 or later
Wiring diagram
The 3-ANNCPU3 Annunciator Controller Module is the control
element for all the LCD and LED/Switch displays in an
enclosure. The 3-ANNCPU3 processes all control information To 24 Vdc
from switches on the displays installed within the cabinet as back box power supply
well as processing the data received from the network for
display.
An internal calendar and clock with leap year function provides
date-time event stamping and initiates timed events. The
controller automatically identifies and supervises all modules
installed in the annunciator, and has an integral watchdog to
identify both hardware and software faults.
The 3-ANNCPU3 communicates with other 3-ANNCPUs and
3-CPUs on the network over a Class A or B RS-485 network
data circuit. The controller functions as the local bus master E + G + G A A B B
SPARE
and supervises all bus traffic between modules in the cabinet. G 2 N 2 N + - + -

N 4 D 4 D
D V V NETWORK
The 3-ANNCPU3 module requires two spaces at the leftmost
position of the enclosure. The controller is secured to the inner
door by two retainer brackets. All field wiring connections to the
3-ANNCPU3 module are made via a plug-in connector,
permitting termination of field wiring without the equipment
installed in the enclosure. All external connections are power-
limited and transient protected. The plug-in connector
facilitates rapid remove-and-replace troubleshooting without Notes
the use of tools.
1. All wiring, except earth ground, is supervised.
3. All wiring is power-limited.
4. 24 VDC available from Primary or Booster Power supply.
Installation Sheet 25JUL03 P/N: 3100650 REV: 1.0

3-ANNCPU3 - Annunciator Controller Module 1/2
To install in a remote annunciator cabinet enclosure:
1. Remove the top module retainer bracket (see figure below).

3. Insert the bottom of the 3-ANNCPU3 into the bottom module retainer bracket.
4. Tilt the 3-ANNCPU3 forward until the top touches the inner door.
6. Secure the top module retainer bracket to the inner door.
7. Connect the cable assembly from P3 on the 3-ANNCPU3 to J2 on the adjacent annunciator strip.
3-ANNCPU3
J3 J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 P3
To install in a 3-EVPWRA:
1. Remove one module retainer bracket and loosen the other (see figure below).
2. Connect cable assembly 360136 (supplied with 3-EVPWRA) to J5 on the 3-ANNCPU3.
3. Remove the 4 locking tabs on the 3-ANNCPU3.
4. Place the 3-ANNCPU3 between the module retainer brackets.
5. Tighten the module retainer brackets on both ends.
6. Connect cable assembly 360136 to 3-EVPWR connector J6.
7. Connect cable assembly 46050-1878 (supplied with 3-EVPWRA) from P3 on the 3-ANNCPU3 to P1 on the 3-EVPWR.
J5
360136
P3
3-EVPWRA
J6
J5
P1
46050-1878
P/N: 3100650 REV: 1.0 25JUL03 Installation Sheet

2/2 3-ANNCPU3 - Annunciator Controller Module
PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
The 3-ANNSM Annunciator Support Module provides the Installation 1 space
electronics required to operate the LED/Switch displays.
The support modules are connected to the 3-ANNCPU by Current Requirements (does NOT include LED/Switch display)
ribbon cables. The 3-ANNSM supports the following Standby 10 mA @ 24 VDC
LED/Switch displays: Alarm 10 mA @ 24 VDC
2-24R 3-24Y 3-24G Operating Environment
3-12SR 3-12SY 3-12SG Temperature 32°F (0°C) to 120°F (40°C)
3-12/S1RY 3-12/S1GY 3-12/S2Y Humidity 93%RH, non-condensing
3-6/3S1G2Y 3-6/3S1GYR
INSTALLATION
1. Fill out and install a label in each LED/Switch display 1
(step 1.) 2
2. Mount the display on the 3-ANNSM module (step 2.)
3. Connect the display ribbon cable (P/N 250186) from TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX
connector J1 on the display to connector J1 on the 3-ANNSM 3-ANNSM 3-ANNSM 3-ANNSM 3-ANNCPU
module (step 3.) 3
J3 J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 P3
4
4. Install the module in the inner door of the enclosure
(Figure 2.)
Installation
1Insert
ID label 1S
NOT FL
2 Mount
Display 5
RT
H
1S
SO T FL
1S
UT
EA T FL
ST
H
6
Figure 2
1S
W T FL
ES
T
2N
D
NO F
RT L
2N
SO F
2N
D
UT L
H
H
Installing the 3-ANNSM on the Inner Door
EA D F
2N
W DF
ST L
ES L
1. Install the lower module retainer bracket (5) on the inner
T
3R
NOD F
RT L
H
door (6) using the nuts (2) provided. Do not tighten the
3R
SO D F
3R
UT L
H nuts at this time.
EA D F
ST L
3R
W DF
ES L
2. Place the 3-ANNSM modules in the lower retainer

T
bracket (5) next to the 3-ANNCPU. Install 3-ANNBF

blank filler plates in any unused space.
3 Connect
Ribbon
Cable 3. Install the top module retainer bracket (1) on the top of
the inner door with the nuts (2) provided. Tighten the
nuts on both the top and bottom brackets.
4. Install the ribbon cables (4) between modules from P3

Faceplate connector on the 3-ANNCPU to J2 on the first 3-ANNSM. Connect
Ribbon Cable on module the ribbon cables from J3 of the first module to J2 of the
P/N 250186 next support module until all modules are connected by
a ribbon cable.
Connector pins on
Verify all pins mate
rear of faceplate
with connector
INSTALLATION SHEET:
3-ANNSM
Annunciator Support Module
Figure 1 INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387312 FILE NAME: 387312.CDR
Mounting the LED/Switch Display REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: D. Becker
DATE: 04/06/99 CREATED BY: D. Miner
Observe static sensitive EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
material handling practices. CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
3-ASU and 3-ASU/4
Audio Source Unit
Product description Termination

Message download: Modular phone jack
Remote microphone: Plug-in terminal strip on 3-ASU
Auxiliary input: Plug-in terminal strip on 3-ASU
Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing at 32 °C
Controls and indicators
Control or
indicator Functional description
Page level Indicates paging volume. When paging, speak
meter at a level that causes the far right LED to only
3-ASU flicker occasionally.
Ready to Green LED flashes during pre-announcement
Page LED tone, then is on steady when the system is
ready to page
All Call Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the All
switch/LED Call mode. Pressing the All Call switch directs
the page to all areas of the facility. To exit the
All Call mode, press the switch a second time
or press the All Call Minus, EVAC, or Alert
switches.
All Call Minus Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the All
switch/LED Call Minus mode. Pressing the All Call Minus
switch directs the page to the areas of the
facility, which have not been automatically
3-ASU/4 selected to receive the EVAC or Alert
tone/message. To exit the All Call Minus
The Audio Source Units (ASU) are shipped unassembled and mode, press the switch a second time or press
consist of a chassis assembly, a controller board, and a cover the All Call, EVAC, or Alert switches.
assembly. The chassis assembly provides the mounting
supports for the controller board and cover assembly. Phone Page Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the
switch/LED Phone Page mode. Pressing the Phone Page
The 3-ASU has a filler plate that mounts on the cabinet inner switch replaces the paging microphone (item
door to prevent access to the electronics. 2) with the firefighter’s telephone system.
Individuals in remote areas of the facility can
The 3-ASU/4 has a chassis assembly that provides a four-slot then issue a page via the firefighter’s
rail for installing rail modules. telephone system. All phone paging is under
the direct control of the ASU operator. Press
Specifications the switch a second time to disconnect the
Phone Page mode.
Cabinet installation: One chassis space
Rack dimensions: 12.0 x 19.0 x 5.25 inches EVAC Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the
(30.48 x 48.26 x 13.34 cm) switch/LED EVAC mode. Pressing the EVAC switch
Operating current: 45 mA directs the page to areas of the facility, which
Options: 3-ASUMX/nn Memory (nn = minutes of messages) are automatically receiving the evacuation
Audio channels: 8 simultaneous tone/message. To exit the EVAC mode, press
Audio inputs the switch a second time or press the All Call,
Local microphone (isolated and supervised) All Call Minus, or Alert switches.
Remote microphone (isolated and supervised)
Firefighter's telephone (isolated and supervised) Alert Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the
One aux signal source (isolated and supervised) switch/LED Alert mode. Pressing the Alert switch directs
Prerecorded message storage the page to areas of the facility, which are
2 minutes standard (expandable to 100 minutes) automatically receiving the Alert
Auxiliary input tone/message. To exit the Alert mode, press
Input impedance: 1 kW the switch a second time or press the All Call,
Input level: 0.1 Vrms to 1.0 Vrms All Call Minus, or EVAC switches.
Frequency response: 100 Hz to 4 kHz
Installation Sheet 19AUG04 P/N: 270482 REV: 3.0

3-ASU and 3-ASU/4 - Audio Source Unit 1/4
Installation instructions 4. If used, install the 3-ASUMX memory card in connector J4
on the ASU. Make sure the Write Protect switch is in the
WARNING: Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or “off” or “write enabled” position.
removing components. Failure to do so may result in serious 5. Connect the RCIC cabling as shown on this installation
injury or loss of life. sheet.
6. Wire the ASU as shown on this installation sheet.
Caution: This equipment contains components that are
sensitive to static electricity. Failure to follow proper handling Installing the ASU cover assemblies
procedures may cause equipment damage. 1. Lower the ASU cover assembly onto the mounting studs
designated in the diagrams below.
Installing the ASU
1. Mount the chassis assembly to the backbox mounting studs Mounting studs for ASU cover assembly
using the hardware provided. (Align the mounting studs
with the holes indicated by the arrows in the figure below.)
RCIC
J3
Secure chassis to
backbox studs with RCIC
#8-32x locknut here
Mounting studs for ASU cover assembly
RCIC
3-CHASS
2. Secure the ASU board to the designated stand-offs in the ASU

figure below with the 6-32 x 3/8 panhead screws provided.
ASU RCIC
Use #6-32 x 3/8

panhead screws
to mount the ASU
to the chassis.
ASU cover assembly
3. Connect the ribbon cable (P/N 250195-01) from J1 on the

Rail Chassis Interface Card (RCIC) to J2 on the ASU. 2. Connect the ribbon cable from the ASU cover assembly to
J3 on the ASU board.
3. Make sure the microphone cable is securely connected to
the board.
4. Secure the ASU cover assembly to the 3-CHASS with the
ASU RCIC locknuts provided in the hardware kit.
J2
J1
Ribbon cable
P/N 250195-01 Cover
assembly
Threaded
J4 mounting
stud #8 x 32 locknut
3-CHASS
P/N: 270482 REV: 3.0 19AUG04 Installation Sheet

2/4 3-ASU and 3-ASU/4 - Audio Source Unit
Wiring diagram
To CPU module TB2- Audio A IN [2] From Listed microphone equipment From listed
coded-tone
output equipment
Notes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1. All wiring is supervised and
power-limited
[2]Connect to TB2 Audio A OUT
+/- on the CPU when
AUDIO DATA TELEPHONE PAGE REMOTE MIC AUX installed in non-network
PRIMARY SECONDARY OUT KEY AUDIO applications
Rail Chassis Interface Card (RCIC) cabling instructions

3-ASU
From previous CHAS-7 J11 BOUT

From previous CHAS-7 J10 COUT
J2 J3 J4
From previous CHAS-7 J10 AOUT BIN
AIN CIN
J6
AOUT DIN From previous CHAS-7 J11 DOUT
J5 J7 To next CHAS-7 J9 BIN

To next CHAS-7 J8 AIN BOUT
RCIC
COUT DOUT
J8 J9
To next CHAS-7 J8 CIN
To next CHAS-7 J9 DIN
RCIC Cable/Connector Guide

P/N Cable Connector
P/N 250190
P/N 250191
P/N 250192

3-ASU and 3-ASU/4 - Audio Source Unit 3/4
3-ASU/4
From previous CHAS-7 J10 COUT From previous CHAS-7 J11 BOUT
J2 J3 J4
AIN CIN
J6
J5 J7
BOUT
Top rail
To next CHAS-7 J9 BIN
To next CHAS-7 J8 AIN
RCIC
COUT DOUT
J8 J9
Bottom rail


P/N Cable Connector
P/N 250190
P/N 250191
P/N 250192

4/4 3-ASU and 3-ASU/4 - Audio Source Unit
3-ASU/FT
Audio Source Unit with Firefighter's Telephone (3-FTCU)
Product description Auxiliary input

Input impedance: 1 kW
Input level: 0.1 Vrms to 1.0 Vrms
Frequency response: 100 Hz to 4 kHz
Telephone riser
EOL resistor: 15 KW
Active telephones: 5 max.
Wire type: 1-2 pair twisted-shielded, 18 AWG
(0.75 sq mm) min.
Configuration: Class A/B
Max. line impedance: 52 W, 0.2 mF
Termination
Message download: Modular phone jack
Remote microphone: Plug-in terminal strip on 3-ASU
Auxiliary input: Plug-in terminal strip on 3-ASU
Firefighter’s telephone: Plug-in terminal on 3-FTCU
The Audio Source Unit with Firefighter's Telephone (ASU/FT) Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing at 32 °C
is comprised of the 3-ASU Audio Source Unit (ASU) and the
3-FTCU Firefighter's Telephone Control Unit (FTCU) mounted Controls and indicators
on a common chassis. The firefighter's telephone option in
conjunction with the audio source unit provides the main
telephone riser. The telephone circuit requires a separate Control or
hardwired riser and is not multiplexed over the network audio indicator Functional description
riser. The riser is supervised by the URSM. The ASU/FT 3-ASU
requires one chassis space within an enclosure.
Page level Indicates paging volume. When paging, speak
Operation meter at a level that causes the far right LED to only
flicker occasionally.
When an operator lifts the handset on a remote firefighter's
telephone, the buzzer at the ASU/FT sounds to indicate the Ready to Green LED flashes during pre-announcement
presence of an incoming call. The corresponding incoming call Page LED tone, then is on steady when the system is
LED on a control/display panel also flashes slowly to indicate ready to page
the pending call. All Call Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the All
To silence the buzzer, the operator presses the Silence button switch/LED Call mode. Pressing the All Call switch directs
on the ASU/FT. To connect the pending call to the ASU/FT, the the page to all areas of the facility. To exit the
operator lifts the hand set at the ASU/FT and presses the All Call mode, press the switch a second time
corresponding phone switch at the control/display panel. The or press the All Call Minus, EVAC, or Alert
incoming call LED then stops flashing and remains on. A switches.
steady call LED indicates that the connection has been made All Call Minus Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the All
and communication can begin. switch/LED Call Minus mode. Pressing the All Call Minus
When the URSM detects a trouble on the FTCU riser, the switch directs the page to the areas of the
corresponding LED on the control panel turns on. facility, which have not been automatically
selected to receive the EVAC or Alert
tone/message. To exit the All Call Minus
Specifications mode, press the switch a second time or press
Cabinet installation: One chassis space the All Call, EVAC, or Alert switches.
Rack dimensions: 12.0 x 19.0 x 5.25 inches Phone Page Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the
(30.48 x 48.26 x 13.34 cm) switch/LED Phone Page mode. Pressing the Phone Page
Operating current: 45 mA switch replaces the paging microphone (item
Options: 3-ASUMX/nn Memory (nn = minutes of messages) 2) with the firefighter’s telephone system.
Audio channels: 8 simultaneous Individuals in remote areas of the facility can
Audio inputs then issue a page via the firefighter’s
Local microphone (isolated and supervised) telephone system. All phone paging is under
Remote microphone (isolated and supervised) the direct control of the ASU operator. Press
Firefighter's telephone (isolated and supervised) the switch a second time to disconnect the
One aux signal source (isolated and supervised) Phone Page mode.
Prerecorded message storage
2 minutes standard (expandable to 100 minutes)

3-ASU/FT - Audio Source Unit with Firefighter's Telephone (3-FTCU) 1/4
2. Secure the FTCU board to the designated stand-offs in the
Control or
figure below with the 6/32 x 3/8 panhead screws provided.
indicator Functional description
EVAC Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the
switch/LED EVAC mode. Pressing the EVAC switch
directs the page to areas of the facility, which
are automatically receiving the evacuation Use #6-32 x 3/8 FTCU RCIC
panhead screws
tone/message. To exit the EVAC mode, press to mount the FTCU
to the chassis.
the switch a second time or press the All Call,
All Call Minus, or Alert switches.
Alert Green LED on indicates the ASU is in the
switch/LED Alert mode. Pressing the Alert switch directs
the page to areas of the facility, which are
automatically receiving the Alert
tone/message. To exit the Alert mode, press
the switch a second time or press the All Call,
All Call Minus, or EVAC switches.
3-FTCU 3. Secure the ASU board to the designated stand-offs in the
figure below with the 6-32 x 3/8 panhead screws provided.
Connect The connect switch connects the incoming
switch calls to the master telephone handset
Review The review pending switch scrolls the list of
Pending pending incoming calls
switch ASU FTCU RCIC
ACKnowledge The acknowledge switch silences the call-in
switch buzzer
Use #6-32 x 3/8
Disconnect The disconnect switch is used to remove the panhead screws
to mount the ASU
switch connected phone which is shown in reversed to the chassis.
text on the bottom of the display
Review The review connected switch scrolls the list of
Connected connected calls on the bottom of the display
switch
Installation instructions 4. Connect the first ribbon cable (P/N 250195-00) from J1 on
the Rail Chassis Interface Card (RCIC) to J2 on the FTCU.
WARNING: Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or Connect the second ribbon cable from J1 on the FTCU to
removing components. Failure to do so may result in serious J2 on the ASU.
injury or loss of life.
Caution: This equipment contains components that are

sensitive to static electricity. Failure to follow proper handling
procedures may cause equipment damage.
J2 J1 J2 J1
Installing the ASU and FTCU
1. Mount the chassis assembly on the backbox mounting studs Ribbon cable
using the hardware provided. (Align the mounting studs with (P/N 250195-00)
the holes indicated by the arrows in the figure below.)

J4
5. If used, install the 3-ASUMX memory card in connector J4

on the ASU. Make sure the Write Protect switch is in the
Secure chassis to
RCIC
“off” or “write enabled” position.
backbox studs with
#8-32x locknut here
6. Connect the RCIC cabling as shown on this installation
sheet.
7. Wire the ASU as shown on this installation sheet.

2/4 3-ASU/FT - Audio Source Unit with Firefighter's Telephone (3-FTCU)
Installing the cover assemblies
RCIC
1. Lower the ASU cover assembly onto the designated FTCU
3-CHASS
mounting studs. See the cover mounting diagrams below. ASU
2. Connect the ribbon cable from the ASU cover assembly to

J3 on the ASU board.
3. Secure the ASU cover assembly to the 3-CHASS with the
locknuts provided in the hardware kit. See the Detail
diagram below.
4. Lower the FTCU cover assembly onto the designated
mounting studs. See the Cover mounting diagrams below.
5. Connect the ribbon cable from the FTCU cover assembly
to J3 on the FTCU board.
6. Make sure the microphone cable is securely connected to
the board.
7. Secure the FTCU cover assembly to the 3-CHASS with
the locknuts provided in the hardware kit. See the Detail
diagram below.
ASU cover assembly FTCU cover assembly
Cover mounting diagram

[1] [1] [2] [2]
Cover
J3 assembly
J3
Threaded
mounting
stud #8 x 32 locknut
3-CHASS
[1] [1] [2] [2]
Detail diagram
Cover mounting diagram
Notes
[1] Mounting stud for the ASU cover assembly
[2] Mounting stud for the FTCU cover assembly
Rail Chassis Interface Card (RCIC) cabling instructions
J2 J3 J4
From previous CHAS-7 J11 BOUT
AIN CIN
J6
J5 J7 To next CHAS-7 J9 BIN

To next CHAS-7 J8 AIN BOUT
From previous CHAS-7 J10 COUT P/N Cable Connector
RCIC DOUT P/N 250190

COUT
J8 J9 P/N 250191
P/N 250192

3-ASU/FT - Audio Source Unit with Firefighter's Telephone (3-FTCU) 3/4
ASU wiring diagram
To CPU module TB2- Audio A IN [2] From Listed microphone equipment From listed
coded-tone
output equipment
Notes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1. All wiring is supervised and
power-limited
[2]Connect to TB2 Audio A OUT
+/- on the CPU when
AUDIO DATA TELEPHONE PAGE REMOTE MIC AUX installed in non-network
PRIMARY SECONDARY OUT KEY AUDIO applications
FTCU wiring diagram
[4] [3] [4] [3] [4] [3]
TB3 TB3 TB3

10 9 10 9 10 9 8 7
[1] [1] [1]
Single Input
Single Input Signal Module Single Input Signal Module Single Input Signal Module
Module
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 21 [2]
TB2 TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2 TB1

From +
3-SSDC –
CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 1
TROUBLE TROUBLE URSM
TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6
A A B B Not used
+ - + - TB1
RISER
7 8 9 10
_ 11 12 13 14
_
FTCU + +
Local Cabinet TELEPHONE TELEPHONE
[3] CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 1
24 Vdc +
_
Red
Black
Listed primary or auxiliary power supply
Notes
[1] Set Single Input Signal Modules to personality code 6
[2] Set Single Input Modules to personality code 3
[3] UL/ULC listed 47 kW EOL
[4] Class B (Style Y), twisted-shielded wires
5. All shields shall be continuous and insulated from ground, except at the originating panel
6. All wiring is power-limited

4/4 3-ASU/FT - Audio Source Unit with Firefighter's Telephone (3-FTCU)
The 3-ATPINT Interface card is a 25 VRMS and 70 VRMS Input Voltage 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS
adapter for the ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel. The 3- Number of Circuits 2
ATPINT is required when using a distributed (high Supervisory Isolation DC Blocking Capacitor
voltage) output of an audio amplifier as the audio source
for the ATP.
SPECIFICATIONS
The 3-ATPINT is designed for use with audio source
amplifiers which use 24 VDC output circuit supervision
NOTES
with EOL resistor. Multiple 3-ATPINT cards can be
connected to a common source amplifier using Class B or 1. Use a SIGA-CT1 or SIGA-CT2 (P-code 3) to monitor the
Class A supervision, as provided by the sourcing amplifier. URSM at the end of the audio risers.
2. Use a SIGA-CT1 or SIGA-CT2 (P-code 3) to monitor

ATP trouble contacts.
3. Use a SIGA-CC2 (P-code 7) to select audio from one of

two audio riser circuits.
4. Use a SIGA-CC1 (P-code 5) to switch audio from a

single audio riser to a branch circuit.
JUMPER SETTINGS
5. Use a SIGA-CR or SIGA-UM (P-code 8) to activate the
Jumper Position Input Voltage ATP activity relay.
1/2 Pre-Amp #1 Input 70 VRMS 6. At startup, the 3-ZAxx amplifier must be turned on to the
P1
2/3 Pre-Amp #1 Input 25 VRMS supervisory tone message recorded on the 3-ASU.
1/2 Pre-Amp #2 Input 70 VRMS
P2
2/3 Pre-Amp #2 Input 25 VRMS
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1 Remove the old cover plate and retaining clips on the 3-ATPINT
left side of the ATP (4 screws).
2 Install four spacers (5) in the flanges of the card cage, + - S + - S + - S

and secure with nuts (6).
PRE-AMP 1
3 Mount the 3-ATPINT board (4) on the four short PREAMP 1 IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP
70V 25V
spacers (5) and secure with four long spacers (3).
1 P1
4 Install the new cover plate (2) on the long spacers with PREAMP 2
screws and washers (1) provided. 70V 25V
1 P2
IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP
1 PRE-AMP 2
2
3 + - S + - S + - S
4
5
INSTALLATION SHEET:
6
3-ATPINT ATP Interface
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387284 FILE NAME: 387284.CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: D. Becker
Bottom View
DATE: 04/06/99 CREATED BY: D. Miner
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
G FAX 941-753-1806
A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNALS
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
EDWARDS
INTERNATIONAL,
SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
WIRING
15K! EOL 15K! EOL 15K! EOL 15K! EOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier
TB1
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE
(BACKUP) (Riser 1) (Riser 2) (Riser 3)
TB2
To TB2 on Audio Amplifier To TB2 on Audio Amplifier To TB2 on Audio Amplifier To TB2 on Audio Amplifier
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Field wiring identical Field wiring identical

to riser #1 to riser #1
Shield, Shield,
if used if used
Class A circuits Only
Audio Riser
Output
UL/ULC Listed 15K! EOL
ON LAST ATP ONLY
(For Class B circuits Only) From Power
Amp Output
To Power
Amp Audio
Input
2 3 2 3
Do Not Use
+ - S + - S + - S + -S + -S + - TB4
AMPLIFIER TERMINAL PANEL (ATP) P/N 240068 TB1 IN OUT OUT IN OUT BATT. 120VAC H
+ - S + - S + - S PREAMP #1 PWR AMP #1 OUT 60HZ
WARNING 10A MAX.
N
PRE-AMP 1 AMP #1 FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION G
AGAINST THE RISK OF FIRE, 3AB-20A
PREAMP 1 IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME
70V 25V
1 P1
TB3 + - TYPE 8 RATING FUSE.
FUSE
Removable Cover
PREAMP 2
POWERPANELACTIVITY
120 VAC OUT TB5
70V 25V
FAIL TRBL BATT. IN
IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP
1 P2
AMP #2 24 VDC
WARNING PRE-AMP 2
40AH MAX.
IMPROPER
+ -
CONNECTION
S + -
OF TERMINALS
S + - S
WILL RESULT IN A FAILURE OF POWER SUPPLY TB2 IN
PREAMP #2
OUT OUT
PWR AMP #2
IN OUT
BATT.
OUT
+
+ - S + - S + - S + -S + -S + -
[3AMPCON1.CDR]
Input #2 wired identical to Input #1 Do Not Use
Wiring Notes
1. Circuit polarity shown in supervisory condition.
2. Supervised circuit when URSM is used.
3. Power limited circuit.
4. Back up amplifier size must equal the wattage of the largest
amplifier to be backed up.
5. Set J1 & J2 to match source amplifier output voltage.
JUMPER SETTINGS 6. Refer to Audio Manual, P/N 270219 for additional ATP and
P1 = 1/2, Pre-Amp #1 Input 70 VRMS power amplifier installation information.
P1 = 2/3, Pre-Amp #1 Input 25 VRMS 7. Additional ATPs may be connected to the same audio source by
P2 = 1/2, Pre-Amp #2 Input 70 VRMS connecting the ATP pre-amp output to the pre-amp input of the
P2 = 2/3, Pre-Amp #2 Input 25 VRMS next ATP.
P/N: 387284 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

INSTALLATION
3-BATBKT
To install the 3-BATBKT:

#8-32 lock nut
(4 places) 1. Mount the 3-BATBKT to the 4 threaded stand-offs
at the lower end of the equipment enclosure,
over the standby batteries.
2. Secure the 3-BATBKT using the hardware provided.
INSTALLATION SHEET:
3-BATBKT Battery Bracket

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: D. Munn
DATE: 23APR99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
The 3-BATS is used to convert the RCC7R, RCC14R, Mounting: RCC7R, RCC14R, or RCC21R Enclosures
and RCC21R enclosures to accommodate up to four 65 Construction: 16 Gauge Cold Rolled Steel
AH batteries. The 3-BATS has four grommet holes to
permit wiring to pass through the shelf.
INSTALLATION
Side View
Front View 3-BTSEN
RCC7R, RCC14R or
RCC21R Enclosure
12Volts 3-BATS
12Volts
12Volts
Note: All wiring in this

configuration is
12Volts
non-power limited.
3-BATS INSTALLATION SHEET:
3-BATS
Battery Shelf

DATE: 06APR01 CREATED BY: D. Miner
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
The 3-BTSEN Battery Distribution Bus provides a backup battery Mounting: BC-1 or RCC Series enclosures
bus for supplying backup power to multiple power supplies fed by Power Rating: 30 Amps @ 24 VDC
a common battery. Multiple 3-BTSENs can be used when
Circuit Breaker: 50 amps
additional batteries are required. The 3-BTSEN features a 50 amp
circuit breaker to protect the backup battery power bus. Power Bus: 4 #10-32 machine screws
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C)
The 3-BTSEN mounts in the BC-1 Battery Cabinet or any "RCC Operating Humidity Range: 93% RH non-condensing
Series" enclosure.
WARNINGS
INSTALLATION NOTE
WIRING
Common battery for multiple power supplies Batteries can deliver high currents. Remove all jewelry before
working on these circuits.
To Booster
To Primary
The battery cabinet must be installed in the same room as the fire
alarm panel and wiring run in conduit.
Side View
Enclosure
COVER 3-BTSEN
Black Red
12Volts 12Volts
Individual battery for primary or booster

power supply
To Primary
OR Booster PRODUCT DIAGRAM
Black Red
12Volts 12Volts
Notes:
1. Supervised, not power limited.
2. To get twice the distance between the panel and the 3-
BTSEN, use one pair of wires for each power supply in the INSTALLATION SHEET
panel. Refer to the following table for wire distances.
Allowable Wire Distance Per Pair of Wires Between

3-BTSEN
Remote Battery Cabinet and Power Supply Battery Distribution Bus
Wire Size
# of supplies
fed by one #18 AWG #16 AWG #14 AWG #12 AWG INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387337 FILE NAME: 387337.CDR
2 2 2 2
pair of wires (0.75 mm ) (1.0 mm ) (1.5 mm ) (2.5 mm )
1 8.84 ft. 14 ft. 22.4 ft. 35.4 ft. DATE: 13FEB01 CREATED BY: D. Miner
(2.7 M) (4.27 M) (6.83 M) (10.79 M)
2 4.42 ft. 7 ft. 11.2 ft. 17.7 ft. SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
(1.35 M) (2.13 M) (3.41 M) (5.4 M) OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
3-BTSEN-E
Battery Distribution Bus
Product description Individual pairs of wires from a battery to a 3-PPS/M-230-E

or a 3-BPS/M-230-E
To booster(s)
To primary
and booster
The 3-BTSEN-E Battery Distribution Bus provides a backup

battery bus for supplying backup power to multiple power
supplies fed by a common battery. The 3-BTSEN-E features a
50-amp circuit breaker to protect the backup battery power bus, Black Red
provides a remote temperature sensor that is required when
using remote batteries with the 3-PPS/M-230-E Primary Power
Supply, and mounts in the BC-1 Battery Cabinet or any RCC
+ +
series enclosure. 12 volts 12 volts
Specifications Shared pair of wires from a battery to a 3-PPS/M-230-E and

Mounting: BC-1 or RCC series enclosures a 3-BPS/M-230-E
Power rating: 30 A @ 24 Vdc
Circuit breaker: 50 A
Power bus: Four 10-32 machine screws To 3-PPS/M-230-E and
Temperature sensor: Compatible with 3-PPS/M-230-E Power 3-BPS/M-230-E
Supply
Temperature: -5 to 49 °C
The battery cabinet must be installed in the same room as the Black Red
fire alarm panel and wiring run in conduit.
+ +
12 volts 12 volts
Side view
Enclosure
Notes
Cover 3-BTSEN-E
1. Supervised and nonpower-limited
2. For maximum distances from the battery cabinet and
power supplies, each power supply must have its own pair
of wires from the battery cabinet. Refer to the table below.
Allowable wire distance per pair of wires between remote

Wiring diagrams battery cabinet and power supplies
Temperature sensor wiring Number of Wire size
supplies
fed by one 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG (1.5 12 AWG (2.5
Side View pair of (0.75 mm sq) (1.0 mm sq) mm sq) mm sq)
wires
1 8.84 ft 14 ft 22.4 ft 35.4 ft

(2.7 m) (4.27 m) (6.83 m) (10.79 m)
2 4.42 ft 7 ft 11.2 ft 17.7 ft

(1.35 m) (2.13 m) (3.41 m) (5.4 m)
To 3-PPS TB2
"Temp Mon" terminal

3-BTSEN-E - Battery Distribution Bus 1/1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DIAGRAM
The 3-CAB series of equipment enclosure backboxes are made of
14-gauge steel and finished with a textured baked grey enamel. The
backboxes are designed for semi-flush or surface mounting. Conduit
and nail knockouts, keyhole style mounting holes, and wide wiring
troughs facilitate quick installation.
Chassis assembly design facilitates separation of power-limited and
nonpower-limited circuits inside the backbox by locating power-limited
wiring towards the front of the cabinet and nonpower-limited wiring
towards the rear.
SPECIFICATIONS
3-CAB7B Dimensions (H x W x D)
Rough-In (See note 1) 23.2 in x 24.0 in x 3.86 in
(58.98 cm x 60.9 cm x 9.8 cm)
Finished
Surface Mounted 25.5 in x 27.34 in x 5.5 in
(64.77 cm x 69.4 cm x 14.0 cm)
Semi-Flush Mounted 25.5 in x 27.34 in x1.65 in
(64.77 cm x 69.4 cm x 4.19 cm)
(90.17 cm x 60.9 cm x 9.8 cm)
Finished
(95.89 cm x 69.4 cm x 14.0 cm)
Semi-Flush Mounted 37.75 in x 27.34 in x 1.65 in
(95.89 cm x 69.4 cm x 4.19 cm)
(121.29 cm x 60.9 cm x 9.80 cm)
Finished
(127.0 cm x 69.4 cm x 14.0 cm)
(127.0 cm x 69.4 cm x 4.19 cm)
Note:
1) Add 1/4" to height and width to allow for knockouts when
framing in backbox for semi-flush mounting.
Equipment Capacity
3-CAB7B
Chassis 1 chassis assembly
Batteries 3-CAB21B shown
Model 6V8A 4 max.
Model 12V10A 2 max.
Model 12V17A 2 max.
3-CAB14B
Chassis 2 chassis assemblies
Batteries
Model 6V8A 4 max.
Model 12V10A 2 max.
Model 12V17A 2 max. INSTALLATION SHEET:
3-CAB21B
Chassis 3 chassis assemblies
Batteries 3-CAB Series Equipment
Model 6V8A
Model 12V10A
4 max.
2 max.
Enclosure Backboxes
Model 12V17A 2 max.
REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: K. Patterson
DATE: 24MAY99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton
A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
CABINET INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS
G
F 3-CAB7B 3-CAB14B 3-CAB21B
E
I
D 27.34 in 27.34 in 27.34 in
H A (69.40 cm) (69.40 cm) (69.40 cm)
TOP VIEW C 1.65 in 1.65 in 1.65 in
B (4.19 cm) (4.19 cm) (4.19 cm)
3.86 in 3.86 in 3.86 in
OUTER DOOR B C (9.80 cm) (9.80 cm) (9.80 cm)
A 1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in
D (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm)
ALL KNOCKOUTS 21.0 in 21.0 in 21.0 in
FOR 3/4-INCH CONDUIT E (53.34 cm) (53.34 cm) (53.34 cm)
(1.9 cm) 22.75 in 22.75 in 22.75 in
F (57.8 cm) (57.8 cm) (57.8 cm)
N
24.0 in 24.0 in 24.0 in
G (60.9 cm) (60.9 cm) (60.9 cm)
1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in
M H (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm)
3.0 in 3.0 in 3.0 in
I (7.7 cm) (7.7 cm) (7.7 cm)
O 25.5 in
BACKBOX 37.75 in 50.0 in
OUTER DOOR
J (64.77 cm) (95.89 cm) (127.0 cm)

23.2 in 35.5 in 47.75 in
J K K (58.98 cm) (90.17 cm) (121.3 cm)
1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in
L (3.16 cm) (3.16 cm) (3.16 cm)
L 4.37 in 4.37 in 4.37 in
BATTERY AREA M (11.1 cm) (11.1 cm) (11.1 cm)
DO NOT INSTALL CONDUIT
3.86 in 3.86 in 3.86 in
N (9.80 cm) (9.80 cm) (9.80 cm)
14.1 in 14.1 in 14.1 in
O (35.8 cm) (35.8 cm) (35.8 cm)
POWER-LIMITED AND NONPOWER-LIMITED WIRING REQUIREMENTS

Nonpower-limited
Power-limited
wiring area
wiring area
Fire Alarm System wiring is classified as either power-limited or
nonpower-limited per NEC Article 760. All power-limited wiring
must be separated from all nonpower-limited wiring by a minimum
distance of 1/4 in (6 mm). The system enclosures and chassis Nonpower-limited
assemblies are designed such that nonpower-limited wiring is at wiring area under
the left rear of the cabinet and the power-limited wiring is at the front rail assembly
of the cabinet. When installing nonpower-limited wiring, use the
feed through notches at the left rear of the chassis. When installing
power-limited wiring, use the feed through notches at the right front
of the chassis.
Nonpower-limited
wiring area under
rail assembly
POWER LIMITED
Wire
Right Front
Nonpower-limited
wiring area under
rail assembly
NON-POWER LIMITED
Left Rear
Left Side View

Battery Battery
Right Side View

Front View
P/N: 387557 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2
These instructions are for right-hand swing open
operation of the outer door. For left-hand swing open Outer door assembly
operation, attach the enclosure hardware to the opposite
side. Hinge
STEP1: Installing the enclosure hardware

Back box
1. With the back box securely mounted, attach the outer
door hinge pins to the mounting studs on the back box
left flange.
2. Attach the door stops to the top and bottom mounting
studs on the back box right flange.
3. Attach the lock striker plate to the middle mounting Inner door
studs on the back box right flange. ground strap
stud
STEP 2: Assembling the outer door

1. Place the outer door on a flat surface with the inside Inner door
hinge pin
facing up.
2. Attach hinges to right mounting studs.
Outer door hinge pin
3. Insert the door lock through the opening opposite the
hinges and with the latch pointing towards top of the Hinge stop
door. See figure on other side. #8-32 lock nut

(6 places)
4. Secure lock with the retaining clip.
5. Insert the plastic hole plug in the door opening closest Back box left flange
to the hinges. Inner door
hinge pin
STEP 3: Mounting the outer door assembly

Outer door
1. Set the outer door assembly onto the outer door hinge hinge pin
pins.
2. Attach the hinge stop to the outer door assembly.
3. Attach a grounding strap from the outer door ground Back box
strap stud on the back box to the outer door. right flange
STEP 4: Mounting the inner door

1. Set the inner door onto the inner door hinge pins. #8-32 lock nut
(2 places)
2. Attach a grounding strap from the inner door ground
strap stud on the back box to the inner door. Outer door
ground strap
stud
Lock striker plate
#8-32 lock nut (2 places)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION SHEET:
The 3-CAB series of equipment enclosure doors consists of an inner

and outer door. The outer door may be mounted to either side of the
back box for left-open or right-open operation, has a viewing window,
3-CAB Series Equipment
and is secured with a key lock. A hinged interior door panel isolates Enclosure Doors
the operator from the panel electronics and wiring, yet easily opens for
maintenance.
The 3-CAB series of equipment enclosure doors include: INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 270488 FILE NAME: 270488.CDR
3-CAB7D Grey door w/window for CAB7B back boxes REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: K. Patterson
3-CAB7DR Red door w/window for CAB7B back boxes
DATE: 29MAR99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton
3-CAB14D Grey door w/window for CAB14B back boxes
3-CAB14DR Red door w/window for CAB14B back boxes
3-CAB14D Grey door w/window for CAB21B back boxes A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
3-CAB14DR Red door w/window for CAB21B back boxes 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
Inner Door Assembly
Connect grounding strap
(P/N 260077) to inner door
Mount chassis on six

TOP backbox studs with
CHASSIS supplied hardware.
CENTER
CHASSIS
BOTTOM
CHASSIS
BATTERY AREA
Mount inner door on
inner hinge pins.
Outer Door Installation

Bolt upper hinge assembly to backbox. Connect grounding strap
Outer Door Assembly (left hand door installation shown) (P/N 260077) to outer door.
A
F
D A
Retaining
Clip See details on
other side
E
B
B E
C F
OUTER DOOR - INSIDE VIEW C D

(Left-hand mounting shown)
Mount outer door on lower hinge pin
(left-hand door installation shown)
Female Double Male Bumpers Lock Double Male

Lock Plug Plates Strike Hinge Pin
Hinges Hinge
Left-hand B Left-hand
D&F D E D&F E C
Mounting Latch Up Mounting
Right-hand A&C E Right-hand A&C B F

A B
Mounting Latch Down Mounting
P/N: 270488 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

PRODUCT INFORMATION CABINET INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS
The 3-CAB5(R) cabinet provides 5 local rail module ALL KNOCKOUTS
14.0 in (35.56 cm)
12.7 in (32.26 cm)
(LRM) spaces and up to 10 amp-hour standby batteries. FOR 3/4" CONDUIT
3.1 in 10.9 in (27.69 cm)
(1.9 cm)
The 3-CAB5(R) cabinet is made of 14 gauge steel and (7.87 cm) 1.5 in
finished with a textured baked enamel. The enclosure is 1.3 in (3.81 cm)
(3.30 cm) 3.86 in
suitable for semi-flush or surface mounting. Conduit and (9.80 cm)
nail knockout keyhole style mounting holes and wide TOP VIEW 1.65 in
wiring troughs facilitate quick installation. Cabinet OUTER DOOR (4.19 cm)
design facilitates separation of power limited and non- 16.4 in (41.66 cm)
power limited circuits by locating power limited circuitry 2.6 in
3.86 in
(9.80 cm)
toward the front of the cabinet and non-power limited (6.6 cm)
wiring at the rear of the cabinet. The removable exterior
door mounts on the left side of the cabinet, has a LexanTM
10.4 in (26.42 cm)

viewing window, and is secured with a key lock. A hinged
interior door panel isolates the operator from the internal BACKBOX
electronics and wiring, yet easily opens to reveal the
22.37 in (56.82 cm)
23.87 in (60.63 cm)
24.25 in (61.60 cm)

system components for maintenance.
OUTER DOOR
1.3 in
(3.3 cm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (HWD) BATTERY AREA
3-CAB5B Back Box
Rough-In 22.37 in x 14.0 in x 3.86 in
(56.82 cm x 35.56 cm x 9.80 cm)
NOTE: Add 1/4" to height and width to
allow for knockouts when framing in
backbox for semi-flush mounting.
MODEL DEFINITIONS
Finished
3-CAB5 Cabinet with Door, Gray
(61.60 cm x 16.4 cm x 14.0 cm)
3-CAB5R Cabinet with Door, Red
(61.60 cm x 16.4 cm x 4.19 cm)
Capacity
Modules Five module spaces 3-CAB5 / 3-CAB5-R
Battery Two 10 AH @ 12 VDC
Finish
3-CAB5 Gray textured enamel
3-CAB5R Red textured enamel
CABINET INSTALLATION
1. Mount the backbox at the required location. A
dedicated 120 VAC (for systems using model 3-PPS/M
power supplies), or 230 VAC (for systems using model
3-PPS/M-230 power supplies) 50/60 Hz circuit is
required for each cabinet. Install all conduit and pull all
wiring into the backbox before proceeding to the next
step.
2. Install the outer door at this time. INSTALLATION SHEET:
3. Install the 3-TAMP5 Tamper Switch, if used. 3-CAB5
4. Install the equipment chassis. After all chassis 3-CAB5R
assemblies have been installed, mount the inner door
on the inside hinge pins. INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 270487 FILE NAME: 270487.CDR
5. Connect the ground strap between the stud on the REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: K. Patterson
inner door and the backbox, using the hardware DATE: 12/17/98 REVISED BY: D. Miner
provided.
6. Install the ground strap between the stud on the A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
GS GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
exterior door and the stud on the backbox. GS BUILDING SYSTEMS 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
These instructions are for right-hand swing open
operation of the outer door. For left-hand swing open Outer door assembly
operation, attach the enclosure hardware to the opposite
side. Hinge
STEP1: Installing the enclosure hardware

Back box
1. With the back box securely mounted, attach the outer
door hinge pins to the mounting studs on the back box
left flange.
2. Attach the door stops to the top and bottom mounting
studs on the back box right flange.
3. Attach the lock striker plate to the middle mounting Inner door
studs on the back box right flange. ground strap
stud
STEP 2: Assembling the outer door

1. Place the outer door on a flat surface with the inside Inner door
hinge pin
facing up.
2. Attach hinges to right mounting studs.
Outer door hinge pin
3. Insert the door lock through the opening opposite the
hinges and with the latch pointing towards top of the Hinge stop
door. See figure on other side. #8-32 lock nut

(6 places)
4. Secure lock with the retaining clip.
5. Insert the plastic hole plug in the door opening closest Back box left flange
to the hinges. Inner door
hinge pin
STEP 3: Mounting the outer door assembly

Outer door
1. Set the outer door assembly onto the outer door hinge hinge pin
pins.
2. Attach the hinge stop to the outer door assembly.
3. Attach a grounding strap from the outer door ground Back box
strap stud on the back box to the outer door. right flange
STEP 4: Mounting the inner door

1. Set the inner door onto the inner door hinge pins. #8-32 lock nut
(2 places)
2. Attach a grounding strap from the inner door ground
strap stud on the back box to the inner door. Outer door
ground strap
stud
Lock striker plate
#8-32 lock nut (2 places)
The 3-CAB-E series of equipment enclosure doors consists of an inner

and outer door. The outer door may be mounted to either side of the
back box for left-open or right-open operation, has a viewing window,
3-CAB-E Series Equipment
and is secured with a key lock. A hinged interior door panel isolates Enclosure Doors
the operator from the panel electronics and wiring, yet easily opens for
maintenance.
The 3-CAB-E series of equipment enclosure doors include: INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387549 FILE NAME: 387549.CDR
3-CAB7D-E Grey door w/window for CAB7B back boxes REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: K. Patterson
3-CAB7DR-E Red door w/window for CAB7B back boxes
DATE: 23APR99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton
3-CAB14D-E Grey door w/window for CAB14B back boxes
3-CAB14DR-E Red door w/window for CAB14B back boxes
3-CAB21D-E Grey door w/window for CAB21B back boxes A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
3-CAB21DR-E Red door w/window for CAB21B back boxes 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
Inner Door Assembly
Connect grounding strap
(P/N 260077) to inner door
Mylar film Mount chassis on six

TOP backbox studs with
CHASSIS supplied hardware.
CENTER
CHASSIS
BOTTOM
CHASSIS
BATTERY AREA
Mount inner door on
inner hinge pins.
Outer Door Installation

Bolt upper hinge assembly to backbox. Connect grounding strap
Outer Door Assembly (left hand door installation shown) (P/N 260077) to outer door.
A
F
D A
Gasket
Retaining
Clip See details on
other side
E
B
Plexiglass B E
C F
OUTER DOOR - INSIDE VIEW C D

(Left-hand mounting shown)
Mount outer door on lower hinge pin
(left-hand door installation shown)
Female Double Male Bumpers Lock Double Male

Lock Plug Plates Strike Hinge Pin
Hinges Hinge
Left-hand B Left-hand
D&F D E D&F E C
Mounting Latch Up Mounting
Right-hand A&C E Right-hand A&C B F

A B
Mounting Latch Down Mounting
P/N: 387549 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2
The 3-CHAS7 chassis provides the mounting, internal power, and 19" Rack Installation
data distribution for up to seven plug-in local rail modules. Mounting Dimensions (HWD) 12.0" x 19.0" x 5.25"
studs for two power supplies and one interface module are provided (30.48 cm x 48.26 cm x 13.34 cm)
on each chassis. Chassis design facilitates separation of power limited
and non-power limited circuits by locating power limited circuitry Capacity 7 Local Rail Modules Spaces
toward the front of the chassis and non-power limited wiring at the rear 2 Power Supplies
of the chassis. 1 Interface Module
The 3-CHAS7 chassis mounts to the back wall of 3-CAB7, 3-CAB14,

3-CAB21, RCC-7, RCC-14, and RCC-21 cabinets. Multiple 3-CHAS7
chassis are interconnected within a cabinet using the supplied cables.
The chassis are suitable for direct mounting in a standard EIA 19" rack.
INSTALLATION
Mount the chassis assembly on the six #6-32 studs at the rear of the
cabinet. Secure the chassis to the cabinet with the washers and nuts
provided. An 11/32" nut driver simplifies chassis installation.
If a primary or booster power supply is used with this chassis, mount the
heat sink on the four threaded stand-offs under the rails, then secure the
PC board to the four threaded stand-offs.
Connect the DC power cable (P/N 250187) to connector J2 on the power

supply. For the 3-PPS, connect the 16 pin data ribbon cable (P/N 250188)
to connector P3 on the power supply. For the 3-BPS, connect a 14 pin
data ribbon cable (P/N 250189) to connector P3 on the power supply.
Route both cables up through the rails for later connection to the power
supply/booster monitor module.
Chassis Power and Data Cables

When more than one chassis is installed within a single cabinet, the
chassis power and data circuits must be interconnected. The chassis has
four data connectors and four power connectors. The 3-CHAS7 has two
power (J8 AIN and J11 AOUT) and two data (J9 BIN and J11 BOUT)
3-CHAS7
connectors on the top rail. Two power (J8 CIN and J10 COUT) and two
data (J9 DIN and J11 DOUT) connectors are on the bottom rail, as shown
below.
Top Rail J8 AIN J9 BIN J8

J9
J11
J10
J9
J8
J11
J10
J10 AOUT J11 BOUT

J9
J8
J11
J10
Bottom Rail J8 CIN J9 DIN
J9
J8
J11 [3CHAS7.CDR]
J10
INSTALLATION SHEET:
[3RAILCN1.CDR]
J10 COUT J11 DOUT
3-CHAS7
Installation instructions are continued on following
two pages. Seven Local Rail Module Chassis

DATE: 06/14/99 REVISED BY: D. Miner
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
INSTALLATION (continued)
The figure on the left shows three 3-CHAS7 chassises in a common

Chassis #1 cabinet. Connect the power and data cables as follows:
1. Connect a top rail power cable (3 pin connector) to connector J10

AOUT on the top rail of chassis #1. Route the cable down to chassis
J8
J9 #2, and connect to J8 AIN on the chassis #2 top rail.
J10
J11
2. Connect a top rail data cable (6 pin ribbon cable connector) to
connector J11 BOUT on the top rail of chassis #1. Route the cable
down to chassis #2 and connect to J9 BIN on the chassis #2 top rail.
Top Rail 3. Connect a bottom rail power cable (4 pin connector) to connector J10
COUT on the bottom rail of chassis #1. Route the cable down to
chassis #2 and connect to J8 CIN on the chassis #2 bottom rail.
Bottom Rail Top Rail Power Cable 4. Connect a bottom rail data cable (6 pin ribbon cable connector) to
P/N 250191 connector J11 DOUT on the bottom rail of chassis #1. Route the cable
J9 Top Rail Data Cable down to chassis #2 and connect to J9 DIN on the chassis #2 bottom
J8
rail.
J11
P/N 250190
J10
5. Repeat this process between chassis #2 and chassis #3.
Bottom Rail Power Cable NOTE: The chassis containing the 3-CPU1 Central Processor can only
P/N 250192 have chassis power and data connections made to connectors J10
Bottom Rail Data Cable AOUT and J11 BOUT on the top rail and J10 COUT and J11 DOUT on the
P/N 250190 bottom rail. The chassis containing the 3-CPU can never have
Chassis #2 connections coming into connectors J8 AIN, J9 BIN, J8 CIN or J9 DIN.
J9
J8
J11
J10
Top Rail
Bottom Rail
J9
J8
J11
J10
Top Rail Power Cable

P/N 250191
Top Rail Data Cable
Chassis #3 P/N 250190
J9
Bottom Rail Power Cable
J8
P/N 250192
Bottom Rail Data Cable
J11
J10
P/N 250190
Top Rail
Bottom Rail
J9
J8
J11
J10
[3RAILCN2.CDR]
P/N: 270484 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 3

INSTALLATION (continued)
The figure to the left shows an Audio Source Unit (ASU) and two 3-
Chassis #1 CHAS7 chassis in a common cabinet. The ASU unit is connected to the
two rails using a Rail Chassis Interface Card. The Rail Chassis Interface
Card is mounted below the rails in the 1/2 footprint IRC-3 module space
of the ASU unit chassis.
J9
J8
J11 2 In this example, the ASU can be either the top or middle chassis.
Connect the power and data cables as follows:
J10
1. Connect the top rail power cable (3 pin connector) to connector J10
Top Rail 1
AOUT on the top rail of chassis #1. Route the cable down to the Rail
Chassis Interface Card and connect to J28 AIN.
2. Connect the top rail data cable (4 pin connector) to connector J11
Bottom Rail COUT on the top on bottom rail of chassis #1. Route the cable down to
the Rail Chassis Interface Card and connect to J4 BIN.
J9
J8
J11 4 3. Connect the bottom rail power cable (4 pin connector) to connector
J10
J10 COUT on the bottom rail of chassis #1. Route the cable down to
the Rail Chassis Interface Card and connect to J3 CIN.
3 4. Connect the bottom rail data cable (6 pin ribbon cable connector) to
connector J11 DOUT on the bottom rail of chassis #1. Route the cable
down to the Rail Chassis Interface Card and connect to J6 DIN.
Chassis #2
1 5. Connect a top rail power data cable to connector J5 AOUT on upper
left side of the Rail Chassis Interface Card. Route the cable up to
J9 2 connector J8 AIN on the top rail of chassis #2.
J8
J10
J11
6. Connect a top rail data cable to connector J7 BOUT on the upper right
side of the Rail Chassis Interface Card. Route the cable up to
2 connector J9 BIN on the top rail of chassis #2.
Top Rail 1 J2 J3 J4
7. Connect a bottom rail power cable to connector J8 COUT on the left
BIN
AIN CIN
AOUT
J6
DIN
center of the Rail Chassis Interface Card. Route the cable up to
J5 J7 connector J8 CIN on the bottom rail of chassis #2.
Bottom Rail 3 BOUT
8. Connect a bottom rail data cable to connector J9 DOUT on the right

center of the Rail Chassis Interface Card. Route the cable up to
J1 To Audio connector J9 DIN on the bottom rail of chassis #2.
J9
J8
J1
J11
Source Unit
J10
Rail
Chassis
Interface
4 Card
Chassis #3 COUT DOUT

1
J8 J9
J9
J8
J11 2 Rail Expansion Card

mounted under chassis
J10
with Audio Source Unit

Top Rail LEGEND
Top Rail Power Cable
1
P/N 250191
Bottom Rail 3 Top Rail Data Cable
2
P/N 250190
J9
J8
Bottom Rail Power Cable
4 3
J10
J11 P/N 250192
Bottom Rail Data Cable
4
P/N 250190
[3RAILCN3.CDR]
P/N: 270484 REV: 2.0 Page 3 of 3

PRODUCT INFORMATION 3-LCD
3-CPU1 Central Processor Module
The 3-CPU1 Central Processor module is the control element
for all other rail modules and contro/display modules installed
within an enclosure. The 3-CPU1 processes all information
from modules installed within the cabinet as well as data
received from other panels over the network data riser.
The 3-CPU1 has a 16-bit microprocessor and 1 MB of RAM Power Test CPU
Fail
Gnd
Fault
Disable
and 1 MB of non-volatile memory. An internal calendar/clock Reset Alarm

Silence
Panel
Silence
Drill
with leap year function provides date/time event stamping and

initiates timed events. The 3-CPU1 automatically identifies and
supervises all modules installed on the rail chassis and has an
integral watchdog to identify both hardware and software
faults. The module has Form-C common alarm, trouble and
supervisory relay contacts that operate whenever any alarm,
supervisory, or fault condition is detected on the network.
The 3-CPU1 communicates with other CPU1 modules on the
network over an RS-485 or fiber optic network data circuit. Alarm Supvr Trouble Monitor
Class A or B wiring configuration may be used for the network Previous

1 2 3 Message
data circuit and digital audio circuits. An optically isolated RS- Next
232 port is provided for data upload/download and system 4 5 6
maintenance. An optional optically isolated RS-232 port card is 7 8 9 Details
available to support a printer or an external command system. 0

Command
Menus
The 3-CPU1 also provides the command and control functions

for the 8-channel audio subsystem installed on the rail
chassis.
The 3-CPU1 occupies the two left-most positions on the rail
chassis assembly (logical address 0). In this position it
functions as the local bus master and supervises all traffic on
the rail bus and implements ground fault detection.
The controller is secured to the rail chassis using snap rivet
fasteners. All field wiring connections to the 3-CPU1 module
3-CPU1
are made via plug-in connectors that permit termination of
field wiring without removing the module from the enclosure.
All external connections are power-limited and transient N C N N N C N
N C N
protected. The plug-in connectors and snap rivet mounting

-
C O O A C O C
TROUBLE ALARM SUP
TB1
also facilitate rapid remove and replace troubleshooting. The

3-CPU1 module panel provides support brackets for mounting
the 3-LCD displayor a protective cover plate.
3-LCD Main LCD Display for the 3-CPU1

The 3-LCD Display provides the operator interface for the
network. The 3-LCD mounts on the 3-CPU1 panel support
brackets and is connected to the module with a ribbon cable.
Only one 3-LCD Display is required to provide point of control J1
for the entire network. Additional displays may be added to

any3-CPU1 module located throughout the network, providing
an additional point of control and/or annunciation.
The display provides a 64 by 128-pixel back-lit liquid crystal
display for displaying text. LEDs are provided for: power, test,
CPU fail, ground fault and disable functions. Switches with NETWORK
OUT IN
AUDIO
A IN
AUDIO AUDIO
A OUT B IN
AUDIO
B OUT R T
R
T
C
O R T
R
T
C
O
A A B B
integral LED feedback are provided for reset, trouble silence,

X X S M X X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
alarm silence, and drill functions. Message queue select

switches with integral LEDs are provided for the alarm,
supervisory, trouble, and monitor message queues. Next and
Previous message queue switches scroll through the selected
message queue. The display is also equipped with a 10-digit
INSTALLATION SHEET:
numeric key pad with enter and delete keys.
3-CPU1 Central Processor Module &
Note: 3-CPU1 Boot and Application code must be 3-LCD Main LCD Display for 3-CPU1
version 1.33 or greater
DATE: 26OCT99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS
SPECIFICATIONS
3-CPU1 Central Processor Module 3-LCD Display for 3-CPU1:
Processor: 16-bit, RISC Installation: Plugs into connector J1 on 3-CPU1 module.
Memory: 1 MB RAM - volatile static Mounts on the front of the 3-CPU1 module.
1 MB Flash - non-volatile LCD Display: 64 x 128 pixels, back-lit liquid crystal
32K EEPROM
Indicators:
Installation: Occupies first 2 spaces on rail chassis Power Green LED
Internal RS-232 Serial Port: Isolated, Class B CPU Failure Yellow LED
Connector, RJ-11 Test Yellow LED
Ground Fault Yellow LED
Common Control Relays: 3 Form C relays rated at 24 Vdc @ 1A for Disable Yellow LED
alarm, supervisory, and trouble Reset Yellow LED, integrated with Reset switch
Operating Environment Trouble Silence Yellow LED, integrated with Trouble Silence
Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) switch
Humidity: 93% RH, non-condensing Alarm Silence Yellow LED, integrated with Alarm Silence
switch
Power Requirements Drill Yellow LED, integrated with Drill switch
Standby Current: 100 mA Alarm Red LED
Alarm Current: 110 mA Supervisory Yellow LED
Trouble Yellow LED
Monitor Yellow LED
Operator Controls:
Reset Switch 10-digit keypad w/ Enter and Delete keys
Alarm Silence Switch Message queue scroll switches
Trouble Silence Switch Custom function switch
Drill Switch
Operating Environment
Humidity: 93% RH, non-condensing
Power Requirements
Standby Current 53 mA
Alarm Current 53 mA
INSTALLATION
1. Install the 3-LCD display module (if
required).
• Remove the blank front panels from the
support brackets on the 3-CPU1. Primary power
• Connect the ribbon cable on the 3-LCD supply Primary power
to J1 on the 3-CPU1. The colored edge supply monitor
is pin 1.
• Connect the ground cable on the 3-LCD
to the 2-pin header on the 3-CPU1. The N C N N C N
-
N N C N
2-pin header is located just above the

O C O A C O C
TROUBLE ALARM SUP
TB1
Network B terminals on TB2.

• Snap the 3-LCD onto the left mounting
brackets provided on the 3-LCD.
2. Install any 3-CPU1 option cards, if
required. Refer to the respective
installation sheets for the option card
being installed. J1
3. Slide the 3-CPU1 into the first two rail slots

on the rail chassis assembly. Be careful to
line the option cards into the card guides.
4. Gently push the 3-CPU1 until it is firmly A
+
NETWORK
OUT
A B
- +
IN
B
- +
AUDIO
A IN
-
AUDIO AUDIO
A OUT
+ - +
B IN
-
AUDIO
B OUT
+ -
R
X
1
T
X
1
R
T
S
1
C
O R
M X
1 2
T
X
2
R
T
S
2
C
O
M
2
seated into the rail connectors.

5. Secure the module to the rail by pushing the
top and bottom snap rivet fasteners until
they lock in place.
3-LCD 3-CPU1
6. Connect the field wiring.
P/N: 387465 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 5

FIELD WIRING CONNECTIONS
Network data riser connections
A 3-CPU1 equipped with a 3-RS485A or 3-RS485B card can
communicate with other similarly equipped CPU modules by way
of the network data riser. TB2 on the 3-CPU1 provides the 3-CPU1
terminal connections for connecting to the network data riser. TB2
NETWORK AUDIO
Connect the network data riser to the 3-CPU1 as shown. The OUT IN A IN
NETWORK B terminals provide an isolated connection. The A A B B
NETWORK A terminals are not isolated. Isolated

terminals
Notes
• All network data riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• When connecting the network wiring, always wire the isolated
terminals on one CPU module to the non-isolated terminals of
another.
From NETWORK B+ on To NETWORK A+ on
• On Class B network data risers, the panel that does not have previous CPU module
wires connected to the Network A terminals should be next CPU module
designated as the service panel and located accordingly. From NETWORK B- on To NETWORK A- on
previous CPU module next CPU module
Typical wiring
First panel on Class B Last panel on Class B
network network
3-CPU1 3-CPU1 3-CPU1
TB2 TB2 TB2

NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO
OUT IN A IN OUT IN A IN OUT IN A IN
A A B B A A B B A A B B
Make this the

service panel
Figure-1: Class B network data riser wiring (requires 3-RS485A or 3-RS485B)
TB2 TB2 TB2

Figure-2: Class A network data riser wiring (requires 3-RS485A or 3-RS485B)
P/N: 387465 REV: 2.0 Page 3 of 5

Network audio riser connections

A 3-CPU1 equipped with a 3-RS485A or 3-RS485B card can 3-CPU1
distribute audio messages to other similarly equipped 3-CPU1
modules by way of the network audio riser. TB2 on the 3-CPU1 TB2
provides the terminal connections for connecting to the network AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
A IN A OUT B IN B OUT
audio riser.
Connect the network audio riser to the 3-CPU1 as shown. The
AUDIO IN terminals provide an isolated connection. The AUDIO
OUT terminals are not isolated.
Notes
• All network audio riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• When connecting the network wiring, always wire the isolated From
terminals on one CPU module to the non-isolated terminals of AUDIO DATA PRIMARY
another. on 3-ASU
Figure-3: 3-CPU1 to 3-ASU wiring for single panel

audio applications (no RS-485 card required)
3-CPU1 3-CPU1 3-CPU1 3-CPU1

TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
A IN A OUT B IN B OUT A IN A OUT B IN B OUT A IN A OUT B IN B OUT A IN A OUT B IN B OUT
[AUDIORISER1.CDR]
From
AUDIO DATA PRIMARY
on 3-ASU
Figure-4: Typical Class B network audio riser wiring (requires a 3-RS485A or 3-RS485B card)

TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2
From
[AUDIORISER2.CDR]
AUDIO DATA PRIMARY
connections on 3-ASU
Figure-5: Typical Class A network audio riser wiring (requires a 3-RS485A card)
P/N: 387465 REV: 2.0 Page 4 of 5

System System System

Trouble Alarm Supervisory
relay relay relay
Common relay connections
The 3-CPU1 provides three Form C relays that can be used to activate a
circuit when any alarm, trouble, or supervisory point in the system activates.
The connector pin designations reflect the state of the relay contacts while the
panel is operating in its standy mode (all conditions normal). The trouble relay N C N N C N N N C N
C O O A C O C
contacts also switch on loss of power. TROUBLE ALARM SUP
Note: All common relay wiring is power-limited when connected to a power- TB1
limited source.
3-CPU1
Figure-6: Common relay wiring
RS-232 serial port connections

A 3-CPU1 equipped with a 3-RS232 card can connect to ancillary
devices that use RS-232 data communication. TB2 on the 3-
CPU1 provides the terminal connections for connecting to the 3-
RS232 devices. 3-CPU1
The 3-RS232 card provides two independent ports for connecting
serial devices. TB2
R C R C
Note: All serial port wiring is power-limited and not supervised. R T T O R T T O
X X S M X X S M
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To COM terminal on
listed equipment
To RxD terminal on
listed equipment
To TxD terminal on
listed equipment
TB2 TB2 TB2

R C R C R C R C R C R C
R T T O R T T O R T T O R T T O R T T O R T T O
X X S M X X S M X X S M X X S M X X S M X X S M
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
DB25 male connector DB9 female connector DB25 female connector

rear view rear view rear view
Figure-7: Serial port wiring (requires a 3-RS232 card)

P/N: 387465 REV: 2.0 Page 5 of 5
3-CPU3
Central Processor Module

Installation: Occupies first 2 spaces on rail chassis
Internal RS-232 serial port
N
C
C
TR OUBLE
N
O
N
O
C
ALAR M
N
-
A
N
C
N
O
SUP
C N
C
Type: Isolated, Class B
Connector: RJ-11
Common control relays: 3 Form C relays rated at 30 Vdc @ 1A
TB1
for alarm, supervisory, and trouble

Power requirements
Voltage: 24 Vdc
J1
Note: For battery calculations, these currents include all
listed primary power supplies.
Required software: 3-CPU3 Boot and Application code must be
version 1.33 or later
NETWORK AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO R C R C
OUT IN A IN A O UT B IN B OUT R T T O R T T O
A A B B X X S M X X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
1. Install any 3-CPU3 option cards required. Refer to the
respective installation sheets for the option card being
The 3-CPU3 Central Processor Module is the control element installed.
for all rail modules and control/display modules installed within 2. Slide the 3-CPU3 into the first two rail slots on the rail
an enclosure. The 3-CPU3 processes all information from chassis assembly. Be careful to align the option cards into
modules installed within the cabinet as well as data received the card guides.
from other panels over the network data riser.
3. Gently push the 3-CPU3 until it is firmly seated into the rail
Note: 3-CPU3 is a replacement for the 3-CPU1 and 3-CPU. connectors.
The 3-CPU3 has an internal calendar/clock with leap year 4. Secure the module to the rail by pushing the top and
function provides date/time event stamping and initiates timed bottom snap rivet fasteners until they lock in place.
events. The 3-CPU3 automatically identifies and supervises all 5. Connect the field wiring.
modules installed on the rail chassis and has an integral
watchdog to identify both hardware and software faults. The
module has Form-C common alarm, trouble, and supervisory Primary power
supply Primary power
relay contacts that operate whenever any alarm, supervisory, supply monitor
or fault condition is detected in the network.
The 3-CPU3 communicates with other 3-CPUs on the network
over an RS-485 or fiber optic network data circuit. Class A or B N
O
C
TROUBLE
N
C
N
O
C
ALARM
N
-
A
N
C
N
O
SUP
C N
C
wiring configuration can be used for the network data circuit TB1
and digital audio circuits. An optically isolated RS-232 port is

provided for data upload/download and system maintenance.
An optional optically isolated RS-232 port card is available to
support a printer or an external command system. The 3-CPU3
also provides the command and control functions for the 8-
channel digital audio subsystem installed on the rail.
The 3-CPU3 occupies the two leftmost positions on the rail J1
chassis assembly (logical address 0). In this position it

functions as the local bus master and supervises all traffic on
the rail bus and implements ground fault detection.
The controller is secured to the rail chassis using snap rivet NETWORK AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO R C R C
fasteners. All field wiring connections to the 3-CPU3 module

OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT R T T O R T T O
A A B B X X S M X X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
are made via plug-in connectors. All external connections are

power-limited and transient protected. The plug-in connectors
and snap rivet mounting also facilitate rapid remove-and-
replace troubleshooting. The 3-CPU3 module provides support
brackets for mounting the 3-LCD display or a protective cover 3-CPU3
plate.

3-CPU3 - Central Processor Module 1/4
Field wiring connections
Network data riser connections
3-CPU3
TB2
communicate with other similarly equipped CPU modules by NETWORK AUDIO
way of the network data riser. TB2 on the 3-CPU3 provides OUT IN A IN
A A B B
the terminal connections for connecting to the network data Isolated
riser (Figure 1). Connect the network data riser to the 3- terminals
CPU3 as shown in Figure 2 for class B wiring and Figure 3
for class A wiring. The NETWORK B terminals provide an
isolated connection. The NETWORK A terminals are not
isolated.
Notes From NETWORK B+ on To NETWORK A+ on
previous CPU module next CPU module
• All network data riser wiring is supervised and power-
limited. From NETWORK B- on To NETWORK A- on
• When connecting the network wiring, always wire the previous CPU module next CPU module
isolated terminals on one CPU module to the non-
isolated terminals of another. Figure 1: The NETWORK IN terminals are isolated from
• On Class B network data risers, the panel that does not ground faults
have wires connected to the Network A terminals should
be designated as the service panel and located
accordingly.
First panel on Class B Last panel on Class B

network network

TB2 TB2 TB2
Make this the

service panel
Figure 2: Class B network data riser wiring (requires 3-RS485A or 3-RS485B)

TB2 TB2 TB2
Figure 3: Class A network data riser wiring (requires 3-RS485A or 3-RS485B)

2/4 3-CPU3 - Central Processor Module
Field wiring connections
Network audio riser connections 3-CPU3
TB2
distribute audio messages to other similarly equipped 3- A IN A OUT B IN B OUT
CPU3 modules by way of the network audio riser. TB2 on
the 3-CPU3 provides the terminal connections for connecting
to the network audio riser (Figure 4).
Connect the network audio riser to the 3-CPU3 as shown in
Figures 5 and 6. The AUDIO IN terminals provide an isolated
connection. The AUDIO OUT terminals are not isolated.
From
Notes AUDIO DATA PRIMARY
• All network audio riser wiring is supervised and power- on 3-ASU
limited.
• When connecting the network wiring, always wire the Figure 4: 3-CPU3 to 3-ASU wiring for single panel audio
isolated terminals on one CPU module to the non- applications (no RS-485 card required)
isolated terminals of another.

TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2
From
AUDIO DATA PRIMARY
on 3-ASU
Figure 5: Typical Class B network audio riser wiring (requires a 3-RS485A or 3-RS485B card)

TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2
From
AUDIO DATA PRIMARY
connections on 3-ASU
Figure 6: Typical Class A network audio riser wiring (requires a 3-RS485A card)

3-CPU3 - Central Processor Module 3/4
Field wiring connections RS-232 serial port connections
Common relay connections A 3-CPU3 equipped with a 3-RS232 card can connect to
The 3-CPU3 provides three Form C relays (Figure 7) that ancillary devices that use RS-232 data communication
can be used to activate a circuit when any alarm, trouble, or (Figure 9). TB2 on the 3-CPU3 provides the terminal
supervisory point in the system activates. The connector pin connections for connecting to the 3-RS232 devices (Figure
designations reflect the state of the relay contacts while the 8).
panel is operating in its steady mode (all conditions normal). The 3-RS232 card provides two independent ports for
The trouble relay contacts also switch on loss of power. connecting serial devices.
Note: All common relay wiring is power-limited when Note: All serial port wiring is power-limited.
connected to a power-limited source.
System System System

Trouble Alarm Supervisory
relay relay relay 3-CPU3
TB2
R C R C
R T T O R T T O
X X S M X X S M
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
N C N N C N N N C N
C O O A C O C
TROUBLE ALARM SUP
TB1
3-CPU3
To COM terminal on
listed equipment
To RxD terminal on
Figure 7: Common relay wiring listed equipment
To TxD terminal on
listed equipment
Figure 8: Serial port connections
TB2 TB2 TB2

R C R C R C R C R C R C
R T T O R T T O R T T O R T T O R T T O R T T O
X X S M X X S M X X S M X X S M X X S M X X S M
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
DB25 male connector DB9 female connector DB25 female connector

rear view rear view rear view
Figure 9: Serial port wiring (requires a 3-RS232 card)

4/4 3-CPU3 - Central Processor Module
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
The 3-FIB and 3-FIBA fiber optic communications interface Installation
modules are used to connect two 3-CPU1 panel controllers Connector J2 of 3-CPU1. Fiber card mounts on bracket under 3-CHAS7
together. chassis or on a 3-MPFIB bracket in the 3-CAB5 enclosure.
Fiber Optics (network and audio)
The 3-FIB module provides two supervised Class B (Style 4) Budget 14dB between 2 interfaces
fiber optic circuits; one for network data communications and Cable Type 62.5/125 or 100/140 multimode
the other for network audio. The 3-FIBA module provides two Connectors Type ST
fiber optic circuits for Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) Network Data Circuit
network data communications and two fiber optic circuits for Circuit Configuration Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7)
Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) network audio Data Rate 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K
communications. Isolation From "previous" 3-CPU1 using copper,
total isolation using fiber optics.
Note: The 3-FIBA does not provide Class A audio when used Digitized Audio Data Circuit
with a 3-CPU panel controller module. The 3-FIBA only provides Circuit Configuration Class B (Style 4)
Class A audio when used with a 3-CPU1. Class A (Style 7) only available on
3-FIBA.
Each fiber optic circuit consists of two 62.5/125 or 100/140 Data Rate 327 KB
multimode fiber optic cables. The 3-FIB/3-FIBA also supports Isolation From "previous" 3-CPU1 using copper,
copper wire connections so the network data and audio total isolation using fiber optics.
communications format can easily be changed to and from Copper Wired Network Data Circuit Segment
copper and optical fiber, as job conditions require. Circuit Length 5,000 ft (1,524 m) max. between any
three panels
The fiber optic interface module consists of two cards. The Circuit Resistance 90 Ω, max.
electronics card plugs into the rear of the 3-CPU1 panel Circuit Capacitance 0.3 µF, max.
controller. The electronics card is connected to the fiber card by Wire Type Twisted Pair, 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) min.
a ribbon cable. The fiber card mounts below the 3-CHAS7 Copper Wired Audio Data Circuit
chassis. The fiber card provides type ST fiber optic connectors Circuit Length 5,000 ft (1,524 m) max. between any
and a secondary power option, permitting communications to three panels
flow through the module, even with panel power disconnected. Circuit Resistance 90 Ω, max.
The interface receives and re-transmits network and audio data Circuit Capacitance 0.09 µF, max
information. This permits a fiber optic budget of 14dB between (includes shield capacitance, if required)
any two interfaces. In the event a panel needs to be powered Wire Type Twisted pair, 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) min.
down for service, a 24V battery can be connected to the module Current Rating
to maintain network and audio communications during servicing. Standby 105 mA (both models)
Alarm 105 mA (3-FIB)
110 mA (3-FIBA)
WARNINGS 3-FIB/3-FIBA
This product contains components which are sensitive to static
electricity. Failure to follow proper handling procedures to
prevent damage from electrostatic discharge may result in
equipment failure. P6 NORM TEST P8
P1 JP1 P3
NOTES 3-FIB/A Interface Card
P5 P7
1. All wiring and fiber optic cable are supervised. P2 P4

2. All wiring is power limited. TB1
Note: P7 and P4 on 3-FIBA only
FIBER TESTING INSTALLATION SHEET:
To test the fiber optic connection, place JP1 in the TEST position.
The 3-FIB/3-FIBA will transmit a constant signal which can be 3-FIB/3-FIBA
used for fiber optic budget measurements and troubleshooting. Fiber Optic Communications
Return JP1 to the NORM position when testing is finished.
Interface Module
DATE: 29JAN99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton

CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
Refer to Figure 2. Connect one end of the ribbon cable (4) to connector J2 on the 3-FIB/A electronics card (2) using the end of the ribbon cable which allows the cable to
exit at a right angle to the board as shown in the inset in Figure 1. Install the 3-FIB/A electronics card in J2 of the 3CPU1 (1). The card should be firmly seated in its
connector, then secured to the 3-CPU1 controller board by pressing the snap rivet (3) on the front side of the controller. Route the ribbon cable to the bottom of the
chassis.
To install the 3-FIB/A in a 3-CHAS7, mount the 3-FIB/A interface card (5) on its mounting bracket (6), on the four standoffs (7) provided. Connect the free end of the ribbon
cable from J2 of the 3-CPU1 to J1 on the 3-FIB/A interface card. Place jumper JP1 in the NORM (normal) position.
Refer to Figure 3. Mount the bracket (2) on the two board mounting studs (1) located at the bottom of the chassis. The top of the bracket fits in the slot at the bottom of the
lower rail extrusion (3), as detailed in the inset.
To install the 3-FIB/A in a CAB5 enclosure, snap the 3-FIB/A interface card (5) on the 3-MPFIB mounting bracket (8) studs. Connect the free end of the ribbon cable from
J2 of the 3-CPU1 to J1 on the 3-FIB/A interface card. Place jumper JP1 in the NORM (normal) position. Mount the bracket (8) on the two interface mount studs located on
the right side of the CAB5 enclosure, under the rails.
Figure 1 5
Figure 2
6 J1
3-FIB/A
4 Electronics Card
7
J2
4
2 5
3-FIB/A P6 P8
Electronics Card NORM TEST
J2 JP1
3-FIB/A
P1 P3
P5 Interface Card P7 A IN NET P6

NORM TEST
P8 A IN AUDIO
P2 P4
TB1 JP1
A OUT NET P1 P3 A OUT AUDIO
J2 3-FIB/A Interface Card
3
B IN NET P5 P7 B IN AUDIO
6 (3-FIB/A only)
8 B OUT AUDIO
4 B OUT NET P2 P4
3FIB3.CDR TB1 (3-FIB/A only)
P2
P5
P1
P6
5 3-FIB/A
4
Component Interface Card
Sides
J2
3
3-CPU1
NORM
side view
JP1
TEST
5
P4
P7
P3
P8
J1
8
Figure 3
3-CHAS7 - Front View Side View CAB5
5
8
P2
P5
P1
P6
DS5
DS4
DS8
DS7
J8
J9 3-MPFIB
J10
J11
Mounting 3-FIB/A
Bracket Ingerface
3-PPS(/230) Interface
Card
Card
3-PPS(/230) Footprint
JP1
DS6
DS3
DS2
DS1
J9
J8
P8
P3
P4
P7
J9
J8
J11
J10
J11
J10
[3fibmtg1.CDR]
1 2
P/N: 387333 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 4

INTERCONNECTIONS
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB 3-CPU1 with 3-FIB/A

or
3-CPU1 with 3-FIBA P6 P8
P6 P8
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P1 P3
P1 P3
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P5 P7
P5 P7
P2 P4
P2 P4
Fiber Optic
Fiber Optic Network Data Riser
Network Data Riser Fiber Optic
Audio Data Riser
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB
or 3-CPU1 with 3-FIB/A
P6 P8
P1 P3
P1 P3
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P5 P7
P5 P7
P2 P4
P2 P4
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB

or
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB/A P6 P8
P1 P3 P1 P3
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P5 P7
P5 P7
P2 P4 P2 P4
Fiber Optic Maintain physical separation or

Audio Data Riser 2 hour fire rating
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB 3-CPU1 with 3-FIB/A

or
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P6 P8
P1 P3 P1 P3
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P5 P7 P5 P7
P2 P4 P2 P4
From 3-ASU Primary Audio Data From 3-ASU Primary Audio Data
Figure-4A: 3-FIB(/A) Class B Network and Audio Figure-4B: 3-CPU1 Class A Network and Audio
Fiber Optic Connections Fiber Optic Connections
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB/A
P6 P8
To next panel
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P1 P3
3-CPU1 module
P5 P7
P2 P4
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB or 3-CPU1 with 3-FIBA
P6 P8
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P1 P3 Copper Wire Fiber Optic

P5 P7
Network Data Riser Network Data Riser
P2 P4
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB/A

P6 P8
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fiber Optic P1 P3
Network Data Riser P5 P7
P2 P4

P6 P8
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P1 P3 Fiber Optic
P5 P7
Audio Data Riser
P2 P4
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB/A

P6 P8
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fiber Optic P1 P3
Audio Data Riser P5 P7
P2 P4

P6 P8
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P1 P3
Maintain physical separation or
P5 P7
2 hour fire rating
P2 P4
3-CPU1 with 3-FIB/A

P6 P8
Copper Wire 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P1 P3
Audio Data Riser P5 P7
Copper Wire
Network Data Riser P2 P4
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3-CPU1
3-CPU1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
From 3-ASU
From previous panel Primary Audio
3-CPU1 module Data
Figure-4C: Class B Hybrid Fiber Optic/Copper Wire

Network and Audio Connections Figure-4D: 3-CPU1 Hybrid Fiber Optic/Copper Wire
Network and Class A Fiber Optic/Copper Wire
Audio Connections
P/N: 387333 REV: 2.0 Page 3 of 4
P/N: 387333 REV: 2.0 Page 4 of 4
3-FIBMB
Fiber Optic Interface

Fiber optics (network and audio)
Budget SMXLO: 15 dBm between 2 interfaces
Budget SMXHI: 25 dBm between 2 interfaces
U2 U3 Budget MMXVR: 10 dBm between 2 interfaces
Cable type: 62.5/125 or 100/140 for MMXVR
Connectors: Type Duplex SC for SMXLO and SMXHI, and
Type ST for MMXVR
Network data circuit
Circuit configuration: Class B (style 4) or Class A (style 7)
Data rate: 19.2 K, 38.4 kbps
Isolation: Isolated from previous panel CPU when using
copper, total isolation when using fiber optics.
RX TX RX TX Digitized audio data circuit
B DATA A DATA Circuit configuration: Class B (style 4) or Class A (style 7)
Data rate: 327 kbps
SMXLO Isolation: Isolated from previous panel CPU when using
or MMXVR copper, total isolation when using fiber optics.
SMXHI
Copper wired network data circuit segment
TEST
NORMAL
B AUDIO J2 A AUDIO Circuit length: 5,000 ft (1,524 m) max. between any three
TX RX TX RX
panels
Wire type: Twisted Pair, 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) min.
Copper wired audio data circuit
Circuit length: 5,000 ft (1,524 m) max. between any three
panels
Circuit capacitance: 0.09 mF, max (includes shield
capacitance, if required)
U3 U2
Wire type: Twisted pair, 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) min.

Current rating
3-FIBMB: 217 mA
3-FIBMB Fiber Optic Interface modules communicate network Add 45 mA for each SMXLO and SMXHI
data and audio signals between EST3 panels over single mode Add 20 mA for each MMXVR
and multimode fiber-optic cables. Both Class B and Class A Operating environment
connections are supported. The fiber-optic cables connect to Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
transceivers mounted on the 3-FIBMB. Three transceivers can Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing
be used with the 3-FIBMB: single mode fiber SMXLO, single Compatible panel CPUs: 3-CPU1 and 3-CPU3
mode fiber SMXHI, and multimode fiber MMXVR.
EST3 panels can be networked using fiber-optic cable or
Notes
copper wire (RS-485). Panels can be connected using any • When powering the 3-FIBMB by battery, the battery size
combination of fiber-optic cable and copper wire, as job must support the specific field configuration for the
conditions require. The 3-FIBMB makes it easy to change duration of the service procedure. Example: The 3-FIBMB
between copper and fiber-optic communication formats. plus two SMXHI transceivers for 24 hours would require a
7.37 Ah battery: (217 + (2 x 45)) mA x 24 hr = 7.37 Ah.
The 3-FIBMB includes an adaptor card (P/N 130418), a ribbon
cable (P/N 250222), and a mounting bracket (P/N 200164). • When using a SMXHI transceiver, if fiber attenuation is
The adaptor card plugs into the rear of the panel CPU. The less than 8 dBm between panels, then an attenuator must
ribbon cable connects the adaptor card to the 3-FIBMB. The 3- be used to reduce the level of the received signal
FIBMB mounts on the back of a 3-CAB5 or 3-CHAS7 chassis
using the mounting bracket. • All wiring and fiber-optic cable is supervised
The 3-FIBMB is powered by the panel supply, but it includes • All wiring is power-limited
input terminals for a secondary power source. This permits • The 3-FIBMB does not support annunciator panels
communication to continue through the module, even with the
panel power disconnected. In the event a panel needs to be • Unconditional eye safe laser IEC 825/CDRH Class 1
powered down for service, a 24 V battery source can be compliant
connected to the module to maintain network and audio
communications during servicing. See “Notes,” below.
Installation Sheet 23JUN04 P/N: 3100509 REV: 1.0

3-FIBMB - Fiber Optic Interface 1/4
Caution: This product contains components that are sensitive

to static electricity. Failure to follow proper handling procedures
to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge may result in
equipment failure.
To install the 3-FIBMB:
1. Connect one end of the ribbon cable to connector J2 on

the adaptor card. Use the end of the ribbon cable that RX TX
allows the cable to exit at a right angle to the board. See RX TX
Figure 1. B DATA A DATA
2. Install the adaptor card in J2 on the panel CPU. The card

should be firmly seated in its connector, then secured to
the panel CPU board by tightening the nylon screw and
nut. See Figure 1.
TEST
NORMAL
B AUDIO J2 A AUDIO
3. Route the ribbon cable under the rail to the far right of the TX RX
chassis. TX RX
4. For each transceiver, align the studs and plug on the

transceiver with the holes and socket on the 3-FIBMB
baseboard, then snap the transceiver onto the baseboard.
See Figure 2.
5. Snap the mounting bracket onto the cabinet, using the two
interface mount studs located on the right side of the
enclosure, below under the rails. See Figure 3.
6. Connect the other end of the ribbon cable (from the
adaptor card) to J1 on the 3-FIBMB module. See Figure 1.
7. Snap the 3-FIBMB onto the mounting bracket studs. See
Figure 3. Figure 2: Attaching the transceivers. Any type of transceiver
can be mounted in any of the four positions on the board.
8. Connect the fiber-optic cables to the ST connectors
according to the wiring diagrams. Note: When removing a transceiver from the 3-FIBMB, do not
apply excessive pressure to the transceiver. Apply pressure
only to the board on which the transceivers are mounted.
CAB5 Mounting 3-FIBMB

Nylon Nylon bracket
nut screw
RX TX RX TX
B DATA A DATA
Ribbon
TEST
NORMAL
cable
B AUDIO J2 A AUDIO
J2
TX RX TX RX
J9
J8
J2
J11
J10
3-PPS(/230) 3-FIBMB
J1 footprint
Electronics
card
Figure 3: Mounting the bracket and the 3-FIBMB
Fiber testing
To test the fiber-optic connection, put jumper J2 ( located on
CPU side Fiber-optic the 3-FIBMB board) in the TEST position. The 3-FIBMB then
view Interface module
transmits a constant signal that can be used for fiber-optic
budget measurement and troubleshooting. Return J2 to the
Figure 1: Connecting the ribbon cable and adaptor card NORMAL position when testing is finished.
P/N: 3100509 REV: 1.0 23JUN04 Installation Sheet

2/4 3-FIBMB - Fiber Optic Interface
Wiring diagrams CPU with 3-FIBMB TX RX
A data
A AUDIO
audio
A DATA
TX
The following wiring diagrams can be used with single mode or
RX
A
Network AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RX TX
RX
TX
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT
A A B B
multimode fiber. If using single mode use the SMXLO or + - + - + - + - + - + -
B data
B AUDIO
TX RX
B DATA
audio
TX
RX
SMXHI transceivers. If using multimode use the MMXVR
B
RX TX
RX
TX
transceivers.
Fiber-optic network Fiber-optic audio
data riser data riser
CPU with 3-FIBMB RX
audio
A A UDIO
A DATA
RX
CPU with 3-FIBMB
A
TX TX RX
A data
audio
A AUDIO
TX
A DATA
TX
RX
A
A A B B Network AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RX TX
RX
+ - + - + - + -
TX
+ - + - OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT
B data
TX
B AUDIO
B DATA
A A B B
TX
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
RX
B data
TX RX
B AUDIO
audio
B DATA
RX
TX
RX
B
RX TX
RX
TX
CPU with 3-FIBMB TX RX CPU with 3-FIBMB
A data
TX RX
audio
A A UDIO
A data
A AUDIO
A DATA
audio
TX
RX
A DATA
TX
RX
A
A
Network AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO RX TX RX TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT
A A B B A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
B data
B AUDIO
TX
B data
B AUDIO
TX RX
B DATA
B DATA
audio
TX
TX
RX
B
RX RX TX
RX
RX
TX
Fiber-optic Fiber-optic Maintain physical separation
network data riser audio data riser or two-hour fire rating
CPU with 3-FIBMB TX RX CPU with 3-FIBMB

A data
A AUDIO
audio
TX RX
A DATA
A data
TX
RX
audio
A AUDIO
A DATA
TX
RX
A
A
Network AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO RX TX
RX
TX
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT RX TX
RX
TX
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT A A B B
A A B B + - + - + - + - + - + -
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
B AUDIO
B DATA
B data
TX RX
B AUDIO
audio
B DATA
TX
RX
B
RX TX
RX
TX
From 3-ASU primary audio data
From 3-ASU primary audio data
Class B network and audio fiber-optic connections Class A network and audio fiber-optic connections
CPU with 3-FIBMB RX CPU with 3-FIBMB

audio
A A UDIO
A DATA
RX
RX
audio
A AUDIO
A
Network
A DATA
RX
TX
A
TX
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT Network

TX
TX
A A B B OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT
+ - + - + - + - + - + - A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
B data
TX
B AUDIO
B DATA
B data
TX RX
B AUDIO
audio
TX
B DATA
TX
RX
B
RX
RX
RX TX
RX
TX
Fiber-optic Copper wire network Fiber-optic
To next panel network data riser network data riser
data riser
CPU with 3-FIBMB CPU with 3-FIBMB TX RX
A data
TX RX
audio
A data
A AUDIO
audio
A AUDIO
A DATA
TX
RX
A DATA
TX
RX
A
A

Network AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO RX TX
RX
RX TX
TX
RX
TX
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT A A B B

A A B B + - + - + - + - + - + -
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
TX B data RX
B AUDIO
audio
B DATA
B data
TX
B AUDIO
TX
B DATA
RX
B
TX
RX TX
RX
TX
RX
RX
Fiber-optic
Fiber-optic audio data riser
audio data riser
CPU with 3-FIBMB TX RX
A data
audio
A AUDIO
CPU with 3-FIBMB

A DATA
TX
RX
TX RX
A data

audio
A A UDIO
RX TX
A DATA
TX
RX
RX
TX

A
Network AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO A A B B

RX TX + - + - + - + -
RX
+ - + -
TX

A A B B
B data
TX RX
B AUDIO
audio
B DATA
- + - + - + - + -
TX
RX
+ - +
B
B AUDIO
RX TX
B DATA
RX
TX
Maintain physical separation

or two hour fire rating
Copper wire network data riser
Copper wire audio data riser CPU with 3-FIBMB
TX RX
A data
A AUDIO
audio
A DATA
TX
RX

A
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT RX TX

RX
TX
A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
CPU
B AUDIO
RX
audio
B DATA
RX

TX
TX

A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
Copper wire network data riser

Copper wire audio data riser
CPU
From previous panel Network AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
Hybrid fiber-optic and copper wire network and audio

connections
From ASU primary
audio panel
Hybrid fiber-optic and copper wire network and Class A fiber-

optic and copper wire audio connections

3-FIBMB - Fiber Optic Interface 3/4
Using single mode and multimode transceivers Wiring alternative power terminals
Transition from single mode fiber to multimode fiber requires The 3-FIBMB has terminals for connection to an alternate DC
special configuration for the audio circuit. The following wiring power supply. This allows communication through the module
diagrams show how to wire audio circuits in class B and class when panel power is disconnected.
A using single mode and multimode fiber.
To next panel To next panel To alternate

24 Vdc power
CPU with 3-FIBMB RX
supply
TX
audio
A data
A AUDIO
A DATA
RX
TX
A
RX TX
RX
TX
A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
B AUDIO
TX B data
B DATA
TX
RX RX
+
RX TX RX TX
B DATA A DATA
TB1
–
TEST
NORMAL
CPU with 3-FIBMB
B AUDIO A AUDIO
U2
J2
TX RX
A data
A AU DIO
audio
TX RX TX RX
A DATA
RX
TX

RX TX
RX
TX

A A B B U3
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
U3
TX RX
B data
B AUDIO
B DATA
audio
TX
RX
TX
RX
RX
TX
U2
CPU with 3-FIBMB

U2
U3
TX RX
A data
A AUDIO
audio
A DATA
TX
RX

TX
RX
RX
TX

A A B B
+ - + - + - + -
Note: In the event a panel needs to be powered down for
U3
U2
+ - + -
U3
TX
B data
B AUDIO
B DATA
TX
service, a 24 V battery can be connected to the module to

RX
RX
U2
maintain network and audio communications during servicing.

To previous panel To previous panel
Legend
RX Single mode RX Multimode

audio
audio
RX
RX
X
TX transceiver TX transceiver
TX
TX
Data and audio circuit for Class B using single mode and
multimode fiber
To next panel To next panel
CPU with 3-FIBMB TX RX

A data
A AUDIO
audio
A DATA
TX
RX

RX
RX TX
TX

A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
TX RX
B data
B AUDIO
B DATA
audio
TX
RX
B
RX
RX TX
TX
Multimode transceivers
CPU with 3-FIBMB RX

RX

TX
TX

A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
Single mode transceivers
CPU with 3-FIBMB

audio
A

A A B B
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
To previous panel To previous panel
Data and audio circuit for Class A using single mode and
multimode fiber

4/4 3-FIBMB - Fiber Optic Interface
PRODUCT INFORMATION INSTALLATION
The Traditional Zone module provides eight Class B (Style B) If a Control/LED Display is required on this module, mount it in the
traditional direct connect Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) for recess on the front of the module. Secure the display to the
compatible 2-wire smoke detectors and dry contact initiating module with the four supplied plastic rivets. Connect the display
devices. Four of the eight IDCs may be converted to Class B ribbon cable (P/N 250186) from connector J1 on the display to
(Style Y) Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC). Each pair of connector P1 on the module.
NAC circuits may be configured to provide a 24 VDC or
signals from an external source for audio and telephone The 3-IDC8/4 has four dedicated Class B Initiating Device Circuits
applications. (IDCs) labeled IDC3 & IDC4, and IDC7& IDC8. The module also
has two pairs of configurable Class B circuits. IDC/NAC1/2 and
Each IDC may be set for latching/non-latching operation and IDC/NAC5/6 are configurable as either two Initiating Device
verified/non-verified operation. Each IDC can support up to Circuits or two Notification Appliance circuits (NACs). When
30 model 6270B photoelectric smoke detectors or 50 model configured as NACs, circuits IDC/NAC1 and IDC/NAC2 share a
6250B ionization detectors. Each NAC is rated at 24 VDC @ common signal source. When configured as NACs, circuits
3.5 A or 70 Vrms @ 100 W. 24 VDC power for the notification IDC/NAC5 and IDC/NAC6 share a common signal source. Two
appliances is available directly from the rail chassis. NOTE: jumpers on the module select the signal source for each pair of
Each NAC pair is limited to a total of 3.5 A per two circuits. NACs. Set jumpers JP1, JP2, JP3, & JP4, then install the module
When the rail chassis is used as the 24 VDC source, the on the rail. The jumpers have no effect when IDC/NAC circuits are
module is limited to a 7 A total current draw. Input terminals used as input circuits.
are provided to supply the external signal source.
Before connecting the Traditional I/O Zone Module to the field
The Traditional Zone module requires one connection on the wiring, test the field wiring. When a circuit checks out properly,
rail chassis and is secured to the assembly using snap rivet connect it to the appropriate terminals. Polarity for NAC circuits is
fasteners. All field wiring connections to the Traditional Zone indicated for normal monitoring of the circuit's electrical integrity.
module are made via plug-in connectors, permitting
termination of field wiring without the module installed in the TB1 and TB2 are removable for ease of wiring. All wiring is power
enclosure. The plug-in connectors and snap rivet mounting limited and should be routed through the notches at the right front
also facilitate rapid remove and replace troubleshooting of the chassis.
without the use of tools. The module features a hinged front
panel for mounting displays or a blank protective faceplate. Close the module display door. Latch the door by sliding the upper
latch up and the lower latch down.
SPECIFICATIONS
Installation 1LRM space on the rail
chassis
Module Configuration 8 Initiating Device Circuits, 4 of
which are convertible to 3-IDC8/4
Notification Appliance Circuits
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC)
Wiring Configuration Class B (Style B)
Detector Voltage 16.23 to 25.4 Vdc, Max. ripple TB1
400 mV
Short Circuit Current 75.9mA Max.
Circuit Resistance 50Ω Max. RX TX
JP1 JP2
1 1
Capacitance 100 µF Max. 2

3
2
3
EOL Resistor 4.7KΩ

Detector Load Refer to compatibility listings in
the EST3 Installation and
Service Manual (P/N 270380) 1
2
1
2
3 3
JP3 JP4
Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC)

Wiring Configuration Class B (Style Y)
Voltage 24 Vdc Nominal, 70 Vrms Max.
Current 3.5A @ 24 Vdc TB2
Power 60 W @ 25 Vrms
100 W @ 70 Vrms
EOL Resistor 15 KΩ
INSTALLATION SHEET:
Maximum Wire Size 12 AWG (2.5 mm2 ) 3-IDC8/4
Termination Removable plug-in terminal Traditional Zone I/O Module
strips on module
Current Requirements (does not include LED/Switch module on NAC) INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 270492 FILE NAME: 270492.CDR
Standby 50 mA @ 24 Vdc
Alarm 330 mA @ 24 Vdc
Operating Environment DATE: 12/17/98 CREATED BY: D. Miner
Temperature 32°F (0°C) to 120°F (49°C)
Humidity 93% RH, non-condensing SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
WIRING
1 4
UL/ULC Listed
2 3 4.7KΩ EOL
B401B 6251B-001A DC VOLTS

Base Base O 24
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) See installation manual
Connect to IDC 3, 4, 7, or 8 for additional compatible
IDC/NAC 1, 2, 5, or 6 devices
- - - - - -
+ + + + + + UL/ULC Listed
15KΩ EOL
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT (NAC)

NOTE
Connect to IDC/NAC 1, 2, 5, or 6 WHEN WIRING MODULE FIELD WIRING PLUG,
SCALLOPED EDGE MUST FACE DOWN
AND TERMINAL CLAMP SCREWS FACE UP.
PINS ARE NUMBERED RIGHT T0 LEFT.
IDC/NAC #1
IDC/NAC #2
Observe static sensitive

NAC IN
IDC #3
IDC #4
material handling practices.

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1/2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
JUMPER SETUP
To TB1 on Module
Circuits Signal Source
External via Terminals Internal 24 VDC
(3.5A max. per NAC pair)
IDC/NAC 1/2 JP1 to 1 & 2 JP1 to 2 & 3
TB1 JP2 to 1 & 2 JP2 to 2 & 3
IDC/NAC 5/6 JP3 to 2 & 3 JP3 to 1 & 2

JP4 to 2 & 3 JP4 to 1 & 2
RX TX
JP1 JP2
1 1
2 2
3 3
Wiring Notes
1 1 1. For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appendix.
2 2
3 3
JP3 JP4
2. Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) wire; minimum #18 AWG (0.75
mm2).
3. Shields (if used) must be continuous and free from Earth Ground.
TB2 4. IDC/NACs 1 & 2 share the same input source. Set both JP1 & JP2
to 1/2 for the external source (TB1-9 & 10). Set JP1 & JP2 to 2/3 for
the internal 24 VDC source. NOTE: There is a 3.5 amp total limit for
both NAC1 and NAC2. External sources must be power limited.
5. IDC/NACs 5 & 6 share the same input source. Set both JP3 & JP4
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 to 2/3 for the external source (TB2-1 & 2). Set JP3 & JP4 to 1/2 for
the internal 24 VDC source. NOTE: There is a 3.5 amp total limit
for both NAC5 and NAC6. External sources must be power limited.
6. All wiring is supervised and power limited.

NAC IN
5/6
IDC #8
IDC #7
IDC/NAC #5
IDC/NAC #6
7. Polarity shown in supervisory mode.
P/N: 270492 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

3-LCD
Main LCD Display
Product description Panel Silence: Yellow LED, integrated with Panel Silence
switch
Drill: Yellow LED, integrated with Drill switch
Alarm: Red LED
Power Test CPU
Fail
Gnd
Fault
Disable
Supervisory: Yellow LED
Reset Alarm
Silence
Panel
Silence Drill Trouble: Yellow LED
Monitor: Yellow LED
Operator controls
Reset switch
Alarm Silence switch
Panel Silence switch
Drill switch
Alarm queue switch
Alarm Supvr Trouble Monitor
Supervisory queue switch
Previous Trouble queue switch
1 2 3
Monitor queue switch
Message
Next
Message scroll switches

4 5 6
7 8 9
10-digit keypad with Enter and Delete keys
Details
Command
0 Menus
Details switch
Command Menus switch
The 3-LCD Display provides the operator interface for the Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
system. The 3-LCD mounts on the CPU panel support Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing at 32 °C
brackets and is connected to the module with a ribbon cable.
Only one 3-LCD Display is required to provide point of control Installation instructions
for an entire network. Additional displays may be added to any 1. Remove the blank front panels from the support brackets
CPU module located throughout the network, providing an on the CPU.
additional point of control and/or annunciation.
2. Connect the ribbon cable on the 3-LCD to J1 on the CPU.
The display provides a 64- by 128-pixel, back-lit liquid crystal The colored edge is pin 1.
display for displaying text. LEDs are provided for: power, test,
CPU fail, ground fault, and disable indication. Switches with 3. Connect the ground cable on the 3-LCD to the 2-pin
integral LED feedback are provided for reset, alarm silence, header on the CPU. The 2-pin header is located just
panel silence, and drill functions. Message queue selection above the Network B terminals on TB2.
switches with integral LEDs are provided for the alarm,
4. Snap the 3-LCD onto the left mounting brackets provided
supervisory, trouble, and monitor message queues. Next and
on the CPU.
Previous Message switches scroll through the selected
message queue. The Details switch provides additional
information for the currently selected queue. The Command
Menus switch displays the main menu. The display includes a
10-digit numeric keypad with Enter and Delete keys. N
O
C N
C
N
O
C N
-
N
C
N
O
C N
C
A
Specifications
TROUBLE ALARM SUP
TB1
Installation:
Plugs into connector J1 on CPU module.
Mounts on the front of the CPU module.
Compatible CPU models: 3-CPU, 3-CPU1, 3-CPU3
Power requirements
Ribbon cable
Connected to Standby current Alarm current J1
3-CPU 53 mA 53 mA Ground cable

3-CPU1 53 mA 53 mA
3-CPU3 38 mA 38 mA
LCD display: 64 x 128 pixels, back-lit liquid crystal TB2
Indicators
NETWORK AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO R C R C
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT R T T O R T T O
A A B B X X S MX X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Power: Green LED

Test: Yellow LED
CPU Failure: Yellow LED
Ground Fault: Yellow LED
Disable: Yellow LED 3-LCD CPU
Reset: Yellow LED, integrated with Reset switch
Alarm Silence: Yellow LED, integrated with Alarm Silence
switch
Installation Sheet 09NOV04 P/N: 3100586 REV: 1.0

3-LCD - Main LCD Display 1/1
3-LCDXL
Main LCD Display
Product description Ground Fault: Yellow LED

Disable: Yellow LED
Reset: Yellow LED, integrated with Reset switch
Alarm Silence: Yellow LED, integrated with Alarm Silence
switch
Panel Silence: Yellow LED, integrated with Panel
Power Test CPU GND Disable
Fail Fault
Alarm Panel
Silence switch
Reset Silence Silence Drill
Drill: Yellow LED, integrated with Drill switch

Alarm: Red LED
Details
Supervisory: Yellow LED
Command
Menus
Trouble: Yellow LED
Monitor: Yellow LED
Previous
Message Operator controls
Reset switch
Next
Alarm Silence switch

Alarm Supvr Trouble Monitor Panel Silence switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Drill switch
Alarm queue switch
Supervisory queue switch
Trouble queue switch
Monitor queue switch
The 3-LCDXL display provides the operator interface for the 10-digit keypad with Enter and Backspace keys
system. The 3-LCDXL mounts on the CPU panel support Details switch
brackets and is connected to the module with a ribbon cable. Command Menus switch
The 3-LCDXL requires four slots on the rail. Only one 3-LCDXL Message scroll switches
display is required to provide a point of control for an entire Operating environment
network. Additional displays can be added to any panel located Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
throughout the network, providing additional points of control. Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing at 32 °C
The display provides a 240- by 320-pixel, backlit liquid crystal
display for displaying text. The large display allows for a total of Installation instructions
eight event messages to be displayed simultaneously.
1. Remove the blank front panels from the support brackets
LEDs are provided for: power, test, CPU fail, ground fault, and on the CPU.
disable indication. Switches with integral LED feedback are
provided for reset, alarm silence, panel silence, and drill 2. Connect the ribbon cable on the 3-LCDXL to J1 on the
functions. Message queue selection switches with integral CPU. The colored edge is pin 1.
LEDs are provided for the alarm, supervisory, trouble, and 3. Connect the ground cable on the 3-LCDXL to the 2-pin
monitor message queues. Next and Previous Message header on the CPU. The 2-pin header is located just
switches scroll through the selected message queue. The above the Network B terminals on TB2.
Details switch provides additional information for the currently
selected device. The Command Menus switch displays the 4. Snap the 3-LCDXL onto the left mounting brackets
main menu. The display is also equipped with a 10-digit provided on the CPU.
numeric keypad with Enter and Backspace keys.
Specifications N C N N N C N
N C N -
Installation:
O C O A C O C
TR OU BLE ALAR M SU P
TB1
Plugs into connector J1 on CPU module

Mounts on the front of the CPU module
Compatible CPU models: 3-CPU, 3-CPU1, 3-CPU3
Rail requirements: 4 slots
Power requirements
Ribbon cable
Connected to Standby current Alarm current J1
3-CPU 53 mA 62 mA Ground cable

3-CPU1 53 mA 62 mA
3-CPU3 38 mA 52 mA
TB2
LCD display: 240 x 320 pixels, backlit liquid crystal, 24 lines of
N ETWOR K AU DI O AU DI O AU DI O AU DI O R C R C
OUT R T T O R T T O
A A B IN B A IN A OU T B IN B OU T
X X S M X X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
40 characters
Indicators
Power: Green LED
Test: Yellow LED 3-LCDXL CPU
CPU Fail: Yellow LED
Installation Sheet 09NOV04 P/N: 3100707 REV: 1.0

3-LCDXL - Main LCD Display 1/1
Installation
The 3-LDSM LED Display Support Local Rail Module 1 LRM space
provides the circuitry required to operate a Control/LED
display when the cabinet does not have enough Operating Environment
modules installed on a rail chassis to support the 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
number of displays required. 93% RH, non-condensing
INSTALLATION
1.Mount the Control/LED Display in the recess on the

front of the module.
2.Secure the display to the module with the four

supplied plastic rivets.
3.Connect the display ribbon cable (P/N 250186) from 3-LDSM

connector J1 on the display to connector J1 on the
module.
4.Install the module on the rail.
5.Close the module display door. Latch the door by

sliding the upper latch down, and the lower latch up.
TX RX
TX RX
Observe static sensitive

material handling practices.
J1
[3LDSM.CDR]
DC VOLTS
O 24
INSTALLATION SHEET:
3-LDSM
LED Display Support Local Rail Module
DATE: 06/14/99 REVISED BY: D. Miner
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
3-MODCOM, 3-MODCOMP
Modem Communicator
Product description 3-MODCOM

Modem: V.32 bis 14.4 K baud
Dialer communication protocols
3/1, 4/2 format: 20 pulse/round 3/1 and 4/2 double round
Contact ID: DTMF format
SIA DCS: 300 baud
Dialing retries: Programmable
CMS telephone numbers: 80, 25-digit numbers
3-MODCOMP
All 3-MODCOM specifications apply, plus the following.
Pager interface communication protocol
TAP: Telelocator Alphanumeric Protocol for pagers
J1
1. Install a display faceplate in the recess on the front of the
P3
module if needed. Refer to the Control/LED Displays
installation sheet P/N 270493 for more information.
2. Mount the MODCOM in one space on the rail chassis.
The Modem Communicator (MODCOM) is designed with 3. Connect phone lines to Line 1 and Line 2 as indicated on
modem and dialer capabilities. The MODCOM is used for the wiring diagram on this sheet.
downloading information from remote sites.
The MODCOM is designed with dialer communication WARNINGS
capabilities. It sends alarm, supervisory, and trouble
information to a remote site using one or two telephone lines 1. Remove AC and battery power before installing or
(two per NFPA 72). This information can be reported in dual or removing option modules.
split format for sending to any desired receiver.
2. Components in this system are static sensitive. Discharge
The MODCOMP is designed with pager interface static buildup on your body before handling.
communication capabilities. Information is sent to remote sites
like the MODCOM, but can also be sent to individual 3. The MODCOM does not place calls or monitor the panel
or phone line during the programming process.
predefined pagers.
4. When programming emergency numbers and/or making
Multiple MODCOMs can be used in a cabinet and in a network
environment. Every 24 hours, the MODCOM performs an test calls to emergency numbers:
automatic test call to verify communications between the fire a. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the
alarm panel and the Central Monitoring Station (CMS). dispatcher the reason for the call.
b. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as
Specifications early morning or late evenings.
All MODCOMs 5. It is up to the installer to verify DACT/receiver compatibility
Input power: 60 mA (supervisory), 95 mA (active) at least once per year.
Mounting: One expansion slot
Phone line: One/two loop start line on public switched
telephone network, pulse, or DTMF dialing. (Party, ground
start, and PBX lines are not acceptable.)
Wall connector: Standard RJ31X or RJ38X phone jack
Line supervision
Trouble when: On-hook line voltage < 10 V
Off-hook current < 10 mA
Telco compliance: Communications Canada CS-03,
FCC/CFR 47 Part 68
Humidity: 0 to 93% RH (noncondensing)
FCC registration number: EDWUSA-47115-AL-E

3-MODCOM, 3-MODCOMP - Modem Communicator 1/2
Wiring diagram
SURGE
PROTECTOR RING
(RED)
TIP
YELLOW
4 5 (GREEN)
3 6 TO PHONE LINE #2
RJ31X
8 PIN MODULAR (WIRED SAME AS
2 7 CONNECTOR FOR PHONE LINE #1)
BLACK
1 8 PHONE LINE #1
PREMISES 4 5 RJ31X
3 6
PHONES 8 PIN MODULAR
CONNECTOR FOR
2 7 PHONE LINE #2
1 8
NO T-TAPS
PERMITTED
[1] FERRITE
CLAMPS
[3]
Notes
7 FT [2]
[1] Connect J20 and J21 to RJ31X or RJ38X (2.13 M)
(CA31A or CA38A in Canada) telephone
jacks installed by an authorized telephone J20 J21
company representative. Jacks must be MODCOM

installed within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the panel. (FRONT VIEW)
[2] Supervised and nonpower-limited.

[3] Install the provided ferrite clamps as
shown. The clamps must be mounted on
the lines as they exit the cabinet.
FCC Information Industry Canada Information

1. The dialer complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. The dialer's FCC NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This
certification number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) must be seen certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications
from the front. This information must be provided to the telephone company network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the
if requested. appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The
2. An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug cord is supplied with Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's
the dialer. The dialer is designed to be connected to the telephone network satisfaction.
using the supplied cord and an RJ31X or RJ38X jack, which must also Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
comply with FCC Part 68 rules. connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices, which may be equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The
connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not
may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In prevent degradation of service in some situations.
most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5). To be
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative
determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
4. If the dialer causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
will notify you an advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
notify you as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe
a complaint with the FCC, if you believe it is necessary. system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, important in rural areas.
operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the dialer. If
Caution: Users should not attempt to make connections themselves, but should
this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as
for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
appropriate.
6. If trouble is experienced with the dialer, for repair or warranty information,
contact GS Building Systems Corp., 6411 Parkland Drive, Sarasota, Florida NOTICE: The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device provides an
34243 USA. If the dialer is causing harm to the telephone network, the indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a
telephone company may request you disconnect the dialer until the telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
problem is resolved. combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Load
7. No repairs may be performed on the dialer by the user. Numbers of all devices does not exceed 5.
8. The dialer can not be used on public coin phones or party line service
provided by the telephone company.

2/2 3-MODCOM, 3-MODCOMP - Modem Communicator
3-NSHM1(2)
Network Short Haul Modem

Agency listings: UL, ULC
CPU compatibility: 3-CPU1 and 3-CPU3
Installation: Interface Adapter connects to J2 on the CPU,
Network Modem card mounts on 3-MPFIB on CHAS7 or CAB5
A Side
enclosure
Configuration: Class B or Class A
TB1
Data rate: 19.2 Kb, or 38.4 Kb
+ -
Isolation: Isolated from “previous” CPU

RS-485 circuit
Circuit length: 5,000 ft (1,524 m) max. between any three
panels
Circuit resistance: 90 W maximum
JP1
Network 12
3
Circuit capacitance: 0.3 mF maximum
B Side
Wire type: Twisted pair, 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) minimum
Test functions: Remote digital loopback (refer to the EST3
Installation and Service Manual)
Power consumption supervisory or alarm
The NSHM short haul modems provide long distance network NSHM1: 90 mA @ 24 Vdc,
communication between nodes, typically using existing NSHM2: 100 mA @ 24 Vdc
telephone conductors. Operating environment
The NSHM1 provides a single short haul modem and converts Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing at 32 °C
the signal to RS-485 format for network connections to
additional network nodes. The NSHM2 provides two short haul
Short haul modem circuit maximums
modems for use when two short haul modems are required for
connections to additional network nodes. 19 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG
Notes Resistance 16.3 W/1000 ft 51.64 W/1000 ft 82.35 W/1000 ft
• Because short haul modems are not compatible with (53.5 W/km) (169.5 W/km) (270.2 W/km)
RS-485 connections, two modems must be used; one Capacitance 83 nF/mi 83 nF/mi 83 nF/mi
connected to each panel. [15.72 pF/ft] [15.72 pF/ft] [15.72 pF/ft]
• A Ground Fault Detector (model GFD) must be used with (151.6 nF/km) (151.6 nF/km) (151.6 nF/km)
this product. Distance
Each short haul modem circuit consists of two twisted pair @ 38.4 Kb 6 mi (9.7 km) 3.5 mi (5.6 km) 2 mi (3.2 km)
cables. Network wiring can be installed as Class A or Class B, @ 19.2 Kb 9 mi (14.5 km) 5 mi (8 km) 3 mi (4.8 km)
depending on the installation.
The NSHM1 also supports RS-485 connections. This permits
network data communications format changes from short haul Installation instructions
modem connection to RS-485 and from RS-485 to a short haul
modem connection.
WARNING: Power down the panel before proceeding with the
The short haul modems provide a network connection test, installation and wiring instructions.
making the use of a separate signal source unnecessary. This
reduces setup and troubleshooting time.
Note: The short haul modems do not transmit digitized audio
signals between nodes, and they do not support annunciator
panels. The NSHM does support network audio over RS-485
connections at the CPU.
Parts list
• 3-NSHM1(2)
• Ribbon cable
• Modem(s)
• Battery connection wire
• 3-MPFIB

3-NSHM1(2) - Network Short Haul Modem 1/5
Step 1: Mount the MPFIB bracket Step 4: Connect the ribbon cable from J2 on the Interface
Adapter to J1 on the NSHM
CHAS7 Installation Half footprint
mounting space
CPU
J9
J8
J 11
J10
MPFIB
Mounting NSHM
J8
J9
Bracket (rear view)
J 11
J10
Ribbon J1
cable
J2
Interface
CAB5 Installation Adapter
Half footprint
mounting space
3-PPS(/230)
MPFIB
Mounting
J8
J9
Bracket
Step 5: Mount (snap) the NSHM to the MPFIB mounting
J 11
J10
bracket
Note: The ribbon cable must be connected before completing
this step.
Step 2: Mount the Interface Adapter to the CPU
NSHM snaps to standoffs

on the MPFIB
CPU
Interface
Adapter
Mounting
Snap rivet bracket
J2 J2
J2 CPUx
Interface Snap rivet
Adapter
Connected to Ribbon
Interface Adapter cable
Step 3: Set the jumper on the NSHM Step 6: Set up the modem
DIP switch SW1 and SW2 must be set up prior to installation.
The following tables show the proper switch positions.
+ -
NSHM
Rear view
JP1 1 ON
Network 12 2 SW1 SW2
B Side 3 3 4-wire mode
JP1 12 34 5 67 8
Note: This setup configures the wiring of the modem. The

jumper configures BOTH modem (DB25) connections on the
NSHM.

2/5 3-NSHM1(2) - Network Short Haul Modem
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Data rate
19.2 Kbps On On On Off On On On
38.4 KBps On On Off Off On On On
Carrier
4-wire constantly Off
ON
5. Place the modem in the bottom half of the modem case,
and insert the strain-relief assembly into the slot in the
SW2 bottom of the case.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Operation
4-wire full-duplex Off Off On On On On Off Off
Step 7: Wire the modem(s)

1. Open the unit with a screwdriver. Do not insert the
screwdriver more than 1/4 in (0.6 cm) into the enclosure.
The terminal block is located at the back of the unit. 6. Insert the captive screws through the saddle washer, then
insert the screw and washer through the holes in the
DB-25 end of the case.
7. Attach the top of the case.
2. Strip and prepare wire for installation.

3. 4-Wire installation:
Note: Observe wiring polarity between modems. The
Step 8: Connect the modem(s)
G (shield) connection is optional.
Important
Modem 1 Modem 2 1. When connecting the NSHM to a CPU using the Network
wiring wiring A connection on TB2, you must connect the modem to the
XMT (transmit) RCV (receive) Network B side on the NSHM.
ç
XMT (transmit) ç RCV (receive)
} One pair 2. When connecting the NSHM to a CPU using the Network
B connection on TB2, you must connect the modem to the
RCV (receive) ç XMT (transmit) Network A side on the NSHM.
RCV (receive) ç XMT (transmit)

} One pair
4. Place the two halves of the strain-relief assembly on both

sides of the cable and press together lightly. Slide the
assembly to about 2 inches (5.1 cm) from the terminal
posts and press together firmly.

Wiring diagrams
To the next modem connected to the
Network B Side of NSHM Notes
The following notes apply to all wiring diagrams in this topic.
Modem 1
[1] Ditek Module (DTK-2MHLP24B with MB10 base) must be
Note: Make sure the BERT and
LOOP slide switches are in the used if wiring is between buildings
center (normal) position. If not,
the modem will be in a test mode
[2] Each Ditek module adds 0.5 ohms of resistance to the
and will not function properly. line.
[3] Ground Fault Detector (model GFD) must be used. Refer
to installation sheet P/N 387630.
Network
A Side
NSHM
TB1
+ -
JP1
Network 12
3
B Side
Modem 2
(if used)
To the next modem connected to the

Network A Side of NSHM
Network B to A wiring using the NSHM1
Ditek
GFD
Network [1]
[3]
A Side [2]
Ribbon NSHM1
Cable
CPU
Note: No wiring
permitted to Network Network CPU Network
B IN connection. B Side Up to 6 miles A Side
TB2 (see Specifications) Note: No wiring
Network permitted to Network NSHM1
OUT IN Ribbon
A A B B A OUT connection. Cable
+ - + -
TB2
Network
OUT IN
A A B B
+ - + - Network
Ditek
From previous panel controller B Side
[1]
TB2-NETWORK IN B+/B- [2]
To next panel controller

TB2-NETWORK IN A+/A-

4/5 3-NSHM1(2) - Network Short Haul Modem
Network A to B wiring using the NSHM1
Ditek
GFD
[1] Network
[3]
[2] A Side
Ribbon
NSHM1
CPU Cable
CPU Note: No wiring

Network permitted to Network
A Side B IN connection. Network
Note: No wiring B Side
TB2
permitted to Network Ribbon Network
A OUT connection. Cable
NSHM1 OUT IN
A A B B
TB2 + - + -
Network
OUT IN
A A B B
+ - + -
Network
B Side To next panel controller
Up to 6 miles Ditek TB2-NETWORK IN B+/B-
(see Specifications) [1]
From previous panel controller [2]
TB2-NETWORK IN A+/A-
Network wiring using the NSHM2
Ditek Ditek
GFD GFD
[1] [1]
[3] [3]
[2] [2]
Network
A Side
Ribbon
NSHM1
CPU Cable CPU
Network
Network A Side
Note: No wiring A Side Note: No wiring
permitted to Network CPU permitted to Network
B IN connection. Network Single Node A OUT connection.
Ribbon
NSHM1
Ribbon Cable
B Side Cable
NSHM2
TB2 TB2
Network Network
OUT IN OUT IN
A A B B A A B B
+ - + - + - + -
TB2 Network
Network Network
OUT IN B Side
A A B B B Side
Ditek + - + -
[1]
[2]
To next panel controller From previous panel controller
TB2-NETWORK IN B+/B- TB2-NETWORK IN A+/A-
Up to 6 miles Ditek
(see Specifications) [1] Up to 6 miles
[2] (see Specifications)
Wiring alternate power terminals

The short haul modem has terminals for connection to an alternate DC power supply. This allows communication through the
module when panel power is disconnected.
To alternate
24 Vdc power
supply
TB1
+ -
JP1
1
2
3

3-OPS
Off Premises Signal Module
Product description Trouble relay and jumper setup
Contact configuration Jumper JP1 setting

(system normal)
Closed 2/3
TX RX
Open 1/2
Trouble relay operation

3
2
JP1
1 • Three circuit and local energy configurations: Independent
of alarm
• One circuit configuration: Remains closed during alarm
1. Set the jumpers as required.
2. Install a display or blank faceplate on the front of the
module.
The 3-OPS Off Premises Signaling module provides three 3. Mount the 3-OPS module in one space on the rail chassis.
independent reverse polarity circuits for transmitting alarm, 4. Install the provided snap rivet fasteners.
supervisory, and trouble signals to compatible receivers.
Reversing a circuit's polarity indicates an active alarm 5. Connect all wiring using the wiring diagram on this sheet.
condition; loss of circuit continuity indicates circuit trouble. As
an alternate to three independent circuits, the reverse polarity Wiring diagrams
alarm circuit may be configured to transmit panel trouble by
removing circuit continuity, when using a compatible single Note: When wiring the module field wiring plug, the scalloped
circuit reverse polarity receiver. A supervised local energy edge must face down and terminal clamp screws face up. The
master box trip circuit is also provided to activate a 14.5 W pins are numbered right to left.
master box trip coil. A configurable NO/NC trouble contact is
provided on the module.
The 3-OPS module requires one connection on the rail chassis
and is secured to the assembly using snap rivet fasteners. All
field wiring connections to the 3-OPS module are made via
plug-in connectors, permitting termination of field wiring without
having the module installed in the enclosure. The plug-in
connectors and snap rivet mounting also facilitate rapid
remove-and-replace troubleshooting without the use of tools. Three reverse polarity circuit configuration
The module features a hinged front panel for mounting
displays or a blank protective faceplate. To TB1 on Off Premises
Signal Module
Specifications
Installation: 1 space on the rail chassis Trouble relay is
Circuit configuration terminals 1 and 2
Reverse polarity: 3 independent reverse polarity circuits
for alarm, supervisory, and trouble notification [10] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Local energy: 14.5 W coil Dedicated line to
Maximum wire size: 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) reverse polarity
Trouble relay: NO or NC configuration rated 24 Vdc @ 1 A alarm receiver
Termination: Removable plug-in termination strips on module
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Open circuit voltage: 24 Vdc, nominal
Dedicated line to
Short circuit current: 7 mA max. reverse polarity
Current requirements (does not include LED/Switch module) trouble receiver
Standby current: 53 mA @ 24 Vdc
Alarm current: 147 mA @ 24 Vdc [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Operating environment Dedicated line to
Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) reverse polarity
Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing at 32 °C supervisory receiver

3-OPS - Off Premises Signal Module 1/2
Single reverse polarity circuit configuration
To TB1 on Off Premises

Signal Module
Jumper JP1 in position 2/3
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

[10] Dedicated line to
reverse polarity
alarm receiver
Local energy municipal box configuration
To TB1 on Off Premises

Signal Module
Trouble relay is Master box

terminals 1 and 2
[10]
[1] [2] [3]
Municipal circuit
Wiring diagram notes

[1] 250 mA into a 14.5 W trip coil, maximum loop resistance is
25 W
[2] Nonpower-limited circuit is supervised for opens
[3] Polarity shown in normal state
[4] Maximum line resistance is 1,500 W
[5] Current range is 2.6 to 9.5 mA
[6] Complies with NEMA SB3-1969
[7] Power-limited
[8] Use the alarm circuit when set in the “old style” single
circuit configuration
9. Install a UL listed secondary protector (Ditek model
DTK-36VLPSCP) across all outside wiring
[10] 15 KW EOL resistor required across TB1-3 and TB1-4
when 3-OPS is configured as local energy municipal box
and not wired to municipal circuit. Remove for all other
applications.

2/2 3-OPS - Off Premises Signal Module
PRODUCT INFORMATION CABINET INSTALLATION
The Remote Closet Cabinets, RCC Series, are designed 1.Mount the backbox at the required location. Cabinet
for applications where viewing windows are not required, installation dimensions are on the back page. A
such as remote equipment closets. The RCC7R cabinet dedicated 120 VAC (for systems using model 3-PPS/M
provides space for a single chassis, the RCC14R cabinet power supplies), or 230 VAC (for system using model 3-
provides space for two chassis, and the RCC21R provides PPS/M-230 power supplies) 50/60 Hz circuit is required
space for three chassis. All cabinets provide space for up to for each cabinet. Install all conduit and pull all wiring into
50 amp-hour standby batteries. The backboxes are the backbox before proceeding to the next step.
fabricated of 14 gauge steel and finished with a red textured
enamel. The enclosures are designed for surface 2.Install the equipment chassis. Refer to chassis installation
mounting. Conduit and nail knockouts, keyhole style sheet for details.
mounting holes, and wide wiring troughs facilitate quick
installation. Cabinet design facilitates separation of power 3.Connect the door ground strap between the stud on the
limited and non-power limited circuits by locating power door and the backbox using the hardware provided.
limited wiring toward the front of the cabinet and non-power
limited wiring at the rear of the cabinet. The removable
hinged doors mount on the left side of the backboxes and
are secured with key locks. PRODUCT DIAGRAM
SPECIFICATIONS
RCC7R Cabinet
Backbox and Door - Dimensions (HWD)

23.25" x 25.0" x 6.75"
(59.1 cm x 63.5 cm x 17.15 cm)
Capacity
Chassis One chassis
Battery Two 50 AH @ 12 Vdc RCC7R
Door Finish
Red textured enamel
RCC14R Cabinet

35.47" x 25.0" x 6.75"
(90.1 cm x 63.5 cm x 17.15 cm)
Capacity
Normal Configuration
Two chassis and and two 50 AH @ 12 Vdc
Battery Cabinet Configuration
Up to three 3-BTS battery shelves and four
65AH @ 12 Vdc batteries and two 3-BTSEN
Door Finish
Red textured enamel
RCC14R
RCC21R Cabinet
Backbox and Door - Dimensions (HWD) RCC21R

47.72" x 25.0" x 6.75"
(121.2 cm x 63.5 cm x 17.15 cm) INSTALLATION SHEET
Capacity 3-RCC Series
Three chassis and and two 50 AH @ 12 Vdc Remote Closet Cabinets
Battery Cabinet Configuration INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 270486 FILE NAME: 270486.CDR
One chassis and two 3-BTS battery shelves REVISION LEVEL: 3.0 APPROVED BY: K. Patterson
with one 65AH @ 12 Vdc battery per shelf DATE: 13FEB01 CREATED BY: D. Miner
Door Finish
Red textured enamel EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
CAUTION: When used as a L
K
battery cabinet, fasten the N
J RCC7R RCC14R RCC21R
I
cabinet securely to the wall M 23.36 in 35.61 in 47.75 in
A (59.3 cm) (90.4 cm) (121.29 cm)
studs or framing. A loaded TOP VIEW
H
cabinet weighs in excess of 1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in
B (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm)
200 lbs. (90 kg).
FOR 3/4" CONDUIT C (35.8 cm) (35.8 cm) (35.8 cm)
OUTER DOOR (1.9 cm)
GROUND
F
E 23.25 in 35.47 in 47.72 in
STRAP D (59.1 cm) (90.1 cm) (121.21 cm)
4.37 in 4.37 in 4.37 in
E (11.1 cm) (11.1 cm) (11.1 cm)
5.5 in 5.5 in 5.5 in
F (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm)
C
BACKBOX
1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in
G (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm)
5.5 in 5.5 in 5.5 in
H (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm)
1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in

I (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm)
21.44 in 21.44 in 21.44 in
J (54.46 cm) (54.46 cm) (54.46 cm)
23.25 in 23.25 in 23.25 in

K (59.03 cm) (59.03 cm) (59.03 cm)
25.0 in 25.0 in 25.0 in

D L (63.5 cm) (63.5 cm) (63.5 cm)
1.75 in 1.75 in 1.75 in
M (4.45 cm) (4.45 cm) (4.45 cm)
B 3.55 in 3.55 in 3.55 in
N (9.01 cm) (9.01 cm) (9.01 cm)
BATTERY AREA
[3RCC21A2.CDR]
POWER LIMITED AND NON-POWER LIMITED WIRING REQUIREMENTS

Maintain 1/4" (6 mm) between power
Fire Alarm System wiring is classified as either Non-power limited limited and non-power limited wiring,
Power limited
Power Limited or Non-Power Limited per NEC wiring area
wiring area
Article 760. All power limited wiring must be
separated from all non-power limited wiring by a
minimum distance of 1/4 in (6 mm). The system
enclosures and chassis assemblies are designed Non-power limited
such that non-power limited wiring is at the left rear wiring area under
rail assembly
of the cabinet and the power limited wiring is at the
front of the cabinet. When installing non-power
limited wiring, use the feed through notches at the
left rear of the chassis. When installing power Non-power limited
limited wiring, use the feed through notches at the wiring area under
right front of the chassis. rail assembly
Non-power limited
Wire
POWER LIMITED wiring area under
Right Front
rail assembly
NON-POWER LIMITED
Left Rear
Left Side View
Battery Battery
Right Side View

Front View
P/N: 270486 REV: 3.0 Page 2 of 2
PRODUCT INFORMATION CABINET INSTALLATION
The Remote Closet Cabinets, RCC-E Series, are designed 1.Mount the backbox at the required location. Cabinet
for applications where viewing windows are not required, installation dimensions are on the back page. A
such as remote equipment closets. The RCC7R-E cabinet dedicated 230 VAC 50/60 Hz circuit is required for each
provides space for a single chassis, the RCC14R-E cabinet cabinet. Install all conduit and pull all wiring into the
provides space for two chassis, and the RCC21R-E backbox before proceeding to the next step.
provides space for three chassis. All cabinets provide space
for up to 50 amp-hour standby batteries. The backboxes are 2.Install the equipment chassis. Refer to chassis installation
fabricated of 14 gauge steel and finished with a red textured sheet for details.
enamel. The enclosures are designed for surface
mounting. Conduit and nail knockouts, keyhole style 3.Connect the door ground strap between the stud on the
mounting holes, and wide wiring troughs facilitate quick door and the backbox using the hardware provided.
installation. The removable hinged doors mount on the left
side of the backboxes and are secured with key locks.
PRODUCT DIAGRAM
SPECIFICATIONS
RCC7R-E Cabinet

23.25" x 25.0" x 6.75"
(59.1 cm x 63.5 cm x 17.15 cm)
Capacity
Chassis One chassis
Battery Two 50 AH @ 12 Vdc 3-RCC7R-E
Door Finish
Red textured enamel
RCC14R-E Cabinet

35.47" x 25.0" x 6.75"
(90.1 cm x 63.5 cm x 17.15 cm)
Capacity
Two chassis and and two 50 AH @ 12 Vdc
Battery Cabinet Configuration
Two 3-BTS battery shelves with one 65AH @
12 Vdc battery per shelf
Door Finish
Red textured enamel
3-RCC14R-E
RCC21R-E Cabinet
Backbox and Door - Dimensions (HWD) 3-RCC21R-E

47.72" x 25.0" x 6.75"
(121.2 cm x 63.5 cm x 17.15 cm) INSTALLATION SHEET
Capacity 3-RCC-E Series
Three chassis and and two 50 AH @ 12 Vdc Remote Closet Cabinets
Battery Cabinet Configuration INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387551 FILE NAME: 387551.CDR
One chassis and two 3-BTS battery shelves REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: K. Patterson
with one 65AH @ 12 Vdc battery per shelf DATE: 28MAY99 CREATED BY: M. Rimes
Door Finish
Red textured enamel EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
L
K
N
J RCC7R-E RCC14R-E RCC21R-E
I
M 23.36 in 35.61 in 47.75 in
A (59.3 cm) (90.4 cm) (121.29 cm)
TOP VIEW
H
1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in
B (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm)
FOR 3/4" CONDUIT C (35.8 cm) (35.8 cm) (35.8 cm)
OUTER DOOR (1.9 cm)
GROUND
F
E 23.25 in 35.47 in 47.72 in
STRAP D (59.1 cm) (90.1 cm) (121.21 cm)
4.37 in 4.37 in 4.37 in
E (11.1 cm) (11.1 cm) (11.1 cm)
5.5 in 5.5 in 5.5 in
F (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm)
C
BACKBOX
1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in
G (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm)
5.5 in 5.5 in 5.5 in
H (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm)
1.25 in 1.25 in 1.25 in

I (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm) (3.18 cm)
21.44 in 21.44 in 21.44 in
J (54.46 cm) (54.46 cm) (54.46 cm)
23.25 in 23.25 in 23.25 in

K (59.03 cm) (59.03 cm) (59.03 cm)
25.0 in 25.0 in 25.0 in

D L (63.5 cm) (63.5 cm) (63.5 cm)
1.75 in 1.75 in 1.75 in
M (4.45 cm) (4.45 cm) (4.45 cm)
B 3.55 in 3.55 in 3.55 in
N (9.01 cm) (9.01 cm) (9.01 cm)
BATTERY AREA
[3RCC21A2.CDR]
P/N: 387551 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2

The 3-REMICA provides remote paging capability at Power Requirements
stations located throughout a building or campus. The 3- Voltage: 21 - 27 Vdc
REMICA can be connected to other remote microphone Current: 52 mA
units to provide up to 63 stations on the paging circuit.
Space Requirements: 2 spaces in annunciator
The 3-REMICA occupies 2 slot positions in a 2-space, enclosure
6-space or 10-space remote annunciator cabinet. When
installed in a cabinet with an annunciator controller, the Audio Output: 1 Vrms @ 400 Hz - 4 kHz
3-REMICA must occupy the slot positions next to the
controller. Trouble Relay Contacts
Current: 1 A @ 30 Vdc resistive
The 3-REMICA housing assembly provides standoffs for
mounting a Signature single input module when the Wiring
system application requires electrical supervision. The Termination: All wiring connects to terminal
3-REMICA trouble relay contacts change state block
2
whenever an electrical short or open is detected on Size: 14 AWG (1.5 mm ) max.
either the microphone or audio inputs, or whenever Resistance: 210 ! max
power is interrupted to the unit. Capacitance: 0.1 "F
Temperature 32 - 120 °F (0 - 49 °C)
Humidity 93% non-condensing
WARNINGS 3-REMICA
1. This product contains components which are
sensitive to static electricity. Failure to follow proper
handling procedures to prevent damage from LOCAL PAGE ACTIVE
REMOTE PAGE BUSY
electrostatic discharge may result in equipment TROUBLE
failure.
2. Ensure the 24VDC riser is deenergized before
making cable connections.
JUMPER SETTINGS
Jumper JP1 and JP2:
Position A: Selects ac supervision when connecting
the audio output to 3-ASU.
Position B: Selects dc supervision when connecting
the audio output to 3-REMICA.
FRONT SIDE
INSTALLATION SHEET:
1. Remove the top module retainer bracket on the inner
door of the remote annunciator enclosure.
3. Insert the bottom of the 3-REMICA into the bottom 3-REMICA Remote Microphone
module retainer bracket next to the annunciator panel
controller.
4. Tilt the 3-REMICA forward until the top touches the INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387466 FILE NAME: 387466.CDR
inner door. REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: D. Munn
DATE: 19JAN00 CREATED BY: M. Rimes
6. Secure the top module retainer bracket to the inner
door. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
7. Connect the cable assembly from P3 on the CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
annunciator panel controller to P4 on the 3-REMICA. OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
FIELD WIRING
To Audio Source Unit or KEY OUT AUDIO IN

From Remote Microphone
next Remote Microphone Unit See Note 2
See Note 1 AUDIO OUT KEY IN
AUDIO IN
From Remote Microphone
From secondary See Note 2
24VDC riser KEY IN
From primary NC
24VDC riser C To trouble relay
NO interface circuit
TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
JP2
Place jumper to position A when B
audio output is connected to an JP1
Audio Source Unit input. A
B Place jumper to position A when
audio output is connected to an
JP2 A Audio Source Unit input.
Place jumper to position B when B
audio output is connected to the JP1
Remote Microphone input. A
B Place jumper to position B when
audio output is connected to the
A Remote Microphone input.
To next annunciator strip From annunciator controller
Notes:
1. Power-limited and supervised.
2. Terminate KEY IN input with 1.8 k! EOL resistor
when not used.
Trouble Relay Interface Circuit
47 k! EOL
3-REMICA
TB1-19
TB1-20
8 7
Signature Single Input Module

(Personality Code 3)
4 3 2 1
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)

FROM TO
PREVIOUS DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-) NEXT
DEVICE DEVICE
Support standoffs for

mounting Signature module
P/N: 387466 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

The 3-REMICP provides remote paging capability throughout a Power Requirements
building or campus. Each 3-REMICP has two inputs for cascading Voltage: 21 - 27 Vdc
other remote microphone units. Connecting remote microphones in Current: 52 mA
this manner provides up to 63 stations on the paging circuit.
Audio Output: 1 Vrms @ 400 Hz - 4 kHz
Note: Remote microphone units may not be cascaded more than 6 Trouble Relay Contacts
deep (more than 6 units in a single circuit path).
Current: 1 A @ 30 Vdc resistive
The 3-REMICP consists of a page control housing assembly and Wiring
separate circuit card. The 3-REMICP installs onto a 3-CHASS4 Termination: All wiring connects to terminal block
chassis assembly (ordered separately).
Size: 14 AWG (1.5 mm2) max.
Trouble relay contacts provided on the 3-REMICP change state
Resistance: 210 ! max from output of last cascaded
whenever an electrical short or open is detected on either the
remote microphone to input of audio source
microphone or audio inputs, or whenever power is interrupted to the
unit
unit.
Capacitance: 0.1 "f
JUMPER SETTINGS Temperature: 32 - 120 °F (0 - 49 °C)
Humidity: 93% non-condensing
Jumper JP1 and JP2:
Position A: Selects ac supervision when connecting the audio
output to 3-ASU.
LED INDICATORS
Position B: Selects dc supervision when connecting the audio Local page active: lights when paging microphone is keyed and no
output to another remote microphone module. other remote microphones are keyed.
Remote page busy: lights when another remote microphone unit has
control of the paging circuit.
Paging: lights when speaking into the microphone while
WARNINGS the key is pressed.
Trouble: lights when trouble detected with paging circuit.
1. This product contains components which are sensitive to static
electricity. Failure to follow proper handling procedures to prevent
damage from electrostatic discharge may result in equipment
failure.
2. Ensure the 24VDC riser is deenergized before making cable
connections. 3-REMICP
+ G + G E AUDIO KEY AUDIO KEY AUDIO KEY NC C NO

2 N 2 N G
4 D 4 D N OUTPUT INPUT 2 INPUT 1 TROUBLE
V V D
PAGING
1. On the 3-REMIC circuit card assembly, configure JP1 and JP2 LOCAL
PAGE
ACTIVE
for the type of supervision required. REMOTE

PAGE
BUSY
2. Screw the 3-REMIC circuit card to the 3-CHASS4 chassis TROUBLE
assembly using four #6-32 X 1/2 pan head screws. See below.
3. Connect field wiring to 3-REMIC circuit card.
3-REMIC Assembly
4. Connect the ribbon cable on the page control housing assembly
to J1 on the 3-REMIC circuit card.
5. Position the page control housing on the threaded studs and
secure using the four washers and nuts provided.
Page Control Housing Assembly
3-REMIC circuit card 3-CHASS4 chassis assembly INSTALLATION SHEET:

2 N 2 N G
V V D
3-REMICP Remote Microphone

J9
J8
J11
J10

DATE: 15FEB99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton
J9
J8
J11
J10

CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
FIELD WIRING
From primary 24 Vdc riser
From secondary 24 Vdc riser
To remote microphone
TB1-AUDIO INPUT terminals
4
To remote microphone
TB1-KEY INPUT terminals
From remote microphone

TB1-AUDIO OUTPUT terminals
3 From remote microphone

TB1-KEY OUTPUT terminals 2
To trouble relay interface circuit
2
Notes:
1. All wiring supervised and power-limited.
+ + E AUDIO KEY AUDIO KEY AUDIO KEY NC C NO 2 Terminate KEY input terminals with 1.8 k! EOL
2 G 2 G G resistor when not used.
4 N 4 N N OUTPUT INPUT 2 INPUT 1 TROUBLE
V D V D D
3 Shield required when audio riser shares conduit
TB1 with telephone riser.
Remote microphone
4 Connect to audio source unit TB1-REMOTE MIC AUDIO
and -REMOTE MIC KEY input terminals when last remote
microphone unit in chain.

2 N 2 N G
V V D
JP2
Place jumper to position A when B
audio output is connected to an JP1
Audio Source Unit input. A
A B Place jumper to position B when
JP2 audio output is connected to the
Remote Microphone input.
Place jumper to position B when B
audio output is connected to the JP1
Remote Microphone input. A
A B Place jumper to position A when
audio output is connected to an
Audio Source Unit input.
From page control

housing assembly
47 k! EOL
3-REMICP
TB1-19
TB1-20
8 7
Signature Single Input Module

Trouble Relay Interface Circuit (Personality Code 3)
4 3 2 1
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)

FROM TO
PREVIOUS DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-) NEXT
DEVICE DEVICE
P/N: 387519 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2

1. With the wallbox securely mounted, attach
Remote annunciator
the outer door to the outer door mounting studs cabinet wallbox
as shown in Figure-1.
2. Attach a grounding strap from the ground
strap stud on the wallbox to the outer door.
3. On semi-flush mounted wallboxes attach the
inner door to the inner door mounting studs.
See Figure-2. On surface mounted wallboxes
screw the inner door to the mounting holes.
#8-32 lock nut

(2 places)
Grounding
strap
Outer door
#6-32 lock nut

(4 places)
Figure-1: Typical outer door installation
The remote annunciator cabinet door assembly consists of an inner 3-RLCM/D, 3-6ANN/D, and 3-10ANN/D
door and an outer door. The outer door has a viewing window and is
secured in the closed position with a key lock. The inner door provides Remote Annunciator
mounting space for the panel electronics and is secured in the closed
position with a captive screw.
Cabinet Doors
The line of remote annunciator cabinet door assemblies include:
Model Description
3-RLCM/D Grey door with window for the 3-LCDANN semi-flush
and surface mount cabinets DATE: 06DEC99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton
3-6ANN/D Grey door with window for the 6-ANN semi-flush
and surface mount cabinets EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
3-10ANN/D Grey door with window for the 10-ANN semi-flush CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
and surface mount cabinets OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
Note: Figure-2 shows how the inner door attaches to

a wallbox designed for semi-flush mount applications.
Surface mount wallboxes use self-tapping screws and Remote annunciator
cabinet wallbox
pre-drilled holes to attach the inner door to the wallbox.
Outer door
Inner door
#6-32 lock nut

(3 places)
Figure-2: Typical inner door installation (semi-flush mount wallbox shown)
P/N: 387310 REV 2.0 Page 2 of 2

1. With the wallbox securely mounted, attach
Remote annunciator
the outer door to the outer door mounting studs cabinet wallbox
as shown in Figure-1.
2. Attach a grounding strap from the ground
strap stud on the wallbox to the outer door.
3. On semi-flush mounted wallboxes attach the
inner door to the inner door mounting studs.
See Figure-2. On surface mounted wallboxes
screw the inner door to the mounting holes.
#8-32 lock nut

(2 places)
Grounding
strap
Outer door
#6-32 lock nut

(4 places)
Figure-1: Typical outer door installation
The remote annunciator cabinet door assembly consists of an inner 3-RLCM/D-E, 3-6ANN/D-E, and 3-10ANN/D-E
door and an outer door. The outer door has a viewing window and is
secured in the closed position with a turn knob lock. The inner door
Remote Annunciator
provides mounting space for the panel electronics and is secured in the Cabinet Doors
closed position with a captive screw.
The line of remote annunciator cabinet door assemblies include:
Model Description
3-RLCM/D-E Grey door with window for the 3-LCDANN-E semi-
flush and surface mount cabinets DATE: 06DEC99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton
3-6ANN/D-E Grey door with window for the 3-6ANN-E semi-flush
and surface mount cabinets EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
3-10ANN/D-E Grey door with window for the 3-10ANN-E semi-flush CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
and surface mount cabinets OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
Note: Figure-2 shows how the inner door attaches to

a wallbox designed for semi-flush mount applications.
Surface mount wallboxes use self-tapping screws and Remote annunciator
cabinet wallbox
pre-drilled holes to attach the inner door to the wallbox.
Outer door
Inner door
#6-32 lock nut

(3 places)
Figure-2: Typical inner door installation (semi-flush mount wallbox shown)
P/N: 387553 REV 1.0 Page 2 of 2

3-RS485(A/B/R) and 3-RS232
Option Cards
Product description Operating environment

Current requirements
Standby: 55 mA
3-RS232 3-RS485A/B/R
CARD CARD Alarm: 55 mA
3-RS232 Ancillary Communications card
Installation: Plugs into connector J3 on the CPU
Circuit configuration: Class B
Circuit type: Two optically-isolated RS-232 serial
Baud rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
Maximum circuit length: 50 ft (15.2 m)
Minimum wire size: 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm)
3-RS485B, 3-RS485A, 3-RS485R Network Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Communications card Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing at 32 °C
The 3-RS485B, 3-RS485A, and 3-RS485R cards give a panel Standby: 48 mA
the ability to network to other panels. Each card provides two Alarm: 48 mA
independent RS-485 circuits: one for network data
communications and one for digital audio communications.
Note: Do not use a 3-RS485A card with a 3-CPU module. This
causes network system troubles. Use the 3-RS485A card only WARNING: Rail modules should not be plugged into the rail
with a 3-CPU1 or later module. chassis assembly while voltages are present on the rail.
The 3-RS485R is a direct service replacement for older Failure to de-energize the panel before plugging in the rail
3-RS485 assemblies (P/N 240626 and P/N 240971). Failure to module may result in equipment damage.
replace these assemblies with the 3-RS485R may result in
system audio troubles. 1. Plug the option card into the appropriate connector on the
3-RS232 Ancillary Communications card back of the CPU (see the diagram below). The card
should be firmly seated in its connector.
The 3-RS232 Ancillary Communications card gives a panel the
ability to connect to serial devices such as printers, modems, 2. Secure the card to the CPU with the provided #6-32 screw
and external command and control equipment. The 3-RS232 and nut.
card provides two RS-232 serial ports. 3. Plug the CPU into the rail chassis assembly.
Specifications 4. Connect the field wiring. Refer to installation sheet

P/N 387465.
3-RS485B, 3-RS485A, 3-RS485R Network
Communications card
Installation: Plugs into connector J2 on the CPU
Circuit configuration: Class A (3-RS485A and 3-RS485B),
Class B (3-RS485A and 3-RS485B)
Isolation: Network A port not isolated, Network B port
isolated
3-RS232 3-RS485
Wire type: Twisted pair (6 twists per foot min.), 18 AWG card card
(0.75 sq mm) min.
Circuit length: 5,000 ft (1,524 m) between any 3 panels J4A
Circuit resistance: 90 W, max. J4B
J3 J2
Network audio circuit
Circuit configuration: Class A (3-RS485A only), Class B
(3-RS485A and 3-RS485B)
Isolation: Audio AIN and Audio BIN isolated, Audio AOUT
and Audio BOUT not isolated
Wire type: Twisted pair (6 twists per foot min.),
18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) min.
Circuit length: 5,000 ft (1,524 m) between any 3 panels CPU
Circuit resistance: 90 W, max. rear view

3-RS485(A/B/R) and 3-RS232 - Option Cards 1/1
3-SAC
Security Access Control Module

1. Install a display faceplate in the recess on the front of the
module if needed. Refer to the Control/LED Displays
installation sheet P/N 270493 for more information.
2. Mount the 3-SAC in one space on the rail chassis.
3. Connect all SAC Bus wiring to TB2. TB2 is removable for
ease of wiring. All wiring is power-limited and should be
routed through the notches at the right front of the chassis.
4. Close the module display door. Latch the door by sliding
the upper latch up and the lower latch down.
Note: TB1 is not used.
Wiring diagrams
Class A wiring
3-SAC
SAC bus SAC bus TB2
A A B B Ferrite
+ +
clamps
[4]
4 1
[1] [2]
The 3-SAC is a high-speed module used to support Card
Reader Controller modules and Keypad Display modules. The [3] Keypad
3-SAC is capable of Class A and Class B configuration and CRC Display CRC
occupies one rail module space.
The 3-SAC module can support a maximum of 62 CRCs or
KPDISPs. Events are passed to the 3-SAC module, then
passed to the 3-CPU1 for alarm processing.
Class B wiring
Specifications
3-SAC
Mounting: One expansion slot SAC bus SAC bus TB2
Device support A A B B
+ + Ferrite
Class A: 30 devices
clamps
Class B: 62 devices (31 per loop)
Wire size: 14 to 22 AWG (1.5 to 0.25 sq mm) 4 1 [4]
SAC bus wiring 120 ! EOL
Type: unshielded, twisted pair, > 6 twists per foot resistors
Maximum run from 3-SAC: 4,000 ft (1,220 m) @ 25 pF/ft [1] [2]
Maximum total capacitance: 0.1 !F
Maximum total resistance: 52 " Keypad
[3] CRC Display CRC
Maximum voltage: 10 Vdc
Maximum current: 250 mA
Current requirements (does not include LED/Switch module) [1] [2]
Standby/Alarm: 40 mA @ 24 Vdc
Operating environment Keypad
CRC Display CRC
Temperature: 32 °F (0 °C) to 120 °F (49 °C)
WARNINGS Notes
[1] Refer to device installation sheets for proper wiring.
1. Remove AC and battery power before installing or [2] Maximum of 30 devices for Class A, 62 devices
removing option modules. (31 per loop) for Class B.
2. Components in this system are static sensitive. Discharge [3] Security Access Control Bus.
static buildup on your body before handling. [4] Install the provided ferrite clamps as shown. The clamps
must be mounted on the lines as they exit the cabinet.
5. Up to 4,000 ft @ 25 pF/ft (1,220 m). All wiring is power-
limited and supervised.

3-SAC - Security Access Control Module 1/1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FIELD WIRING
Tamper switches are used to detect an open cabinet

door. Three models are available:
• the 3-TAMP5 for the CAB5
• the 3-TAMP for the CAB series of equipment
4.7 kΩ EOL
enclosures
(Yellow-Violet-Red)
• the 3-TAMPRCC for the RCC series of equipment
enclosures
Two end-of-line resistors are soldered to the switch
terminal connections. Use the 4.7 kΩ resistor when
connecting to a IDC8/4 initiating device circuit module.
NO
Use the 47 kΩ end-of-line resistor when connecting to a
NC
Signature input signal module. COM
The tamper switch plunger can be extended to place
the switch in its bypass position and make it appear that
the cabinet door is closed.
47 kΩ EOL
(Yellow-Violet-Orange)
To initiating device
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS circuit +/- inputs
1. Mount the tamper switch to the cabinet (see below).

2. Do one of the following:
• If the tamper switch is being connected to a IDC8/4
initiating device circuit module, cut out the 47 kΩ
end-of-line resistor. PRODUCT DIAGRAM
• If the tamper switch is being connected to a
Signature input signal module, cut out the 4.7 kΩ
resistor.
3. Wire the tamper switch to the initiating device circuit.
3-TAMP
3-TAMP5
3-TAMPRCC
Pull for bypass

INSTALLATION SHEET
operation
3-TAMP, 3-TAMP5, 3-TAMPRCC

#8 flat washer
Cabinet Tamper Switches
(2 places)
#8 lock washer
(2 places) INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387422 FILE NAME: 387422.CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: B. Shivers
#8-32 nut
(2 places) DATE: 17NOV99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton
Figure-1: Tamper switches mount to the top or side of their respective EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
cabinets and are secured using hardware provided in the hardware SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
kit. This figure shows the installation of a 3-TAMP. OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
The model 3-ZA20A/B and 3-ZA40A/B audio amplifiers demultiplex the 8 Installation: 1 rail chassis slot position
multiplexed audio signals on the network audio riser. Under command of Frequency Response: 400 Hz to 4 kHz at -3 dB
the network, 1 of the 8 available signals is distributed over the speaker Harmonic Distortion: < 7%
circuit. Command and control signals for the amplifier are sent and Audio Circuit:
received via the network data riser in response to network programming. Wiring Configuration
3-ZA20B/40B Class B (Style Y)
Amplifers are in 20- and 40-Watt, Class A and Class B versions.
Supervised, power-limited 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms outputs are available on 3-ZA20A/40A Class A (Style Z) or Class B (Style Y)
both versions. Amplifiers use a Class D switch mode design to provide EOL Resistor 15 k! (internal on 3-ZA20A/40A)
better than 80% efficiency. Each amplifier's output is directly wired to a Outputs:
single speaker zone. 3-ZA20A/20B 20 watts @ 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms
3-ZA40A/40B 40 watts @ 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms
Each amplifier has a 1 kHz temporal (3-3-3) tone generator for use as an Current Rating
evacuation signal in the event of a fault with the network audio circuit. A Standby 35 mA (all models)
standby amplifier may be configured for automatic replacement of any Alarm 1.25 A (3-ZA20A/20B)
online amplifier configuration, in the event of an online amplifier failure.
2.30 A (3-ZA40A/40B)
The standby amplifier must be the same wattage as the largest amplifier
within the enclosure. The amplifiers draw power from the primary and 24 Vdc NAC Circuit:
booster power supplies which must be sized according to the enclosure Wiring Configuration
electrical load. 3-ZA20B/40B Class B (Style Y)
3-ZA20A/40A Class A (Style Z) or Class B (Style Y)
Each amplifier is also provided with an independently controlled Voltage 24 Vdc nominal
supervised, power limited 24 VDC Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Current 3.5 A
rated at 3.5 A. This facilitates the addition of visual notification appliances EOL Resistor 15 k! (internal on 3-ZA20A/40A)
to audio notification circuits.
Termination Removable plug-in terminal strips
2
Each amplifier requires one LRM space on the rail chassis and is secured Maximum Wire Size 12 AWG (2.5 mm )
to the assembly using snap rivet fasteners. All field wiring connections to Backup Tone 1 kHz temporal (3-3-3)
the amplifier module are made via plug-in connectors, permitting Operating Environment
termination of field wiring without the module installed in the enclosure.
Temperature 32 - 120 °F (0 - 49 °C)
Humidity 93% RH, non-condensing
WARNINGS
1. This product contains components that are sensitive to static
electricity. Failure to follow proper handling procedures may cause 3-ZA20A/B, 3-ZA40A/B
equipment failure.
2. Rail modules should not be plugged into the rail chassis assembly
while 24 Vdc is present on the rail. Failure to remove 24 Vdc may UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED
TB1
24VDC
NAC/B
+ -
UNUSED
Audio power
damage the equipment. module
subassembly
3. Operating the amplifier at an output greater than that required by
the speaker may overdrive the speaker circuit and result in damage Audio amp 25Vrms 70Vrms
Configuration
to the equipment. transformer jumper
subassembly
J4
J3
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Output gain

adjust
1. If the panel is already in service, disconnect the storage battery

then deenergize the mains ac circuit supplying power to the panel.
JP1
Configuration
1
JP2
1
jumpers
TB2
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
- + - + S - + S - +
2. Set jumpers JP1 and JP2 on the audio power module subassembly
for 25 or 70 Vrms, depending on the input required by the audio
circuit speakers. Front view Rear view
JP1 JP2
25 Vrms 2 to 3 2 to 3 INSTALLATION SHEET:
70 Vrms 1 to 2 1 to 2
3. Set the jumper on the audio amp transformer subassembly for 25 or
3-ZA20A, 3-ZA20B, 3-ZA40A, 3-ZA40B
70 Vrms, depending on the input required by the audio circuit Zoned Audio Amplifiers
speakers.
4. Slide the amplifier module into the required rail chassis slot
position.
5. Gently push the zone amplifier module into the connectors to
ensure good contact. REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: E. Onstine
6. Secure the zone amplifier module to the rail by pushing in the top DATE: 05FEB00 CREATED BY: G. Sutton
and bottom snap rivet fasteners.
7. Connect the field wiring. SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
Note: The gain control pot may be adjusted later for desired output OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
level. Fully CCW is maximum gain and fully CW is minimum gain. INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
FIELD WIRING
Notes:

2 Install listed 15k ohm EOL resistor on last device only when wired
3-ZAxx
as Class B (Style Y) riser.
3. Polarity designations on connector indicate output signal polarity
TB2 for circuit supervision. The polarity reverses in an alarm condition.
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
4 Shield required when audio riser and telephone riser share
S S
the same conduit.
5 Twisted pair not required only when audio circuit riser shares
conduit exclusively with 24 Vdc riser or in conduit by itself.
6. A maximum of 10 SIGA-CC1s or SIGA-CC2s may be installed
on the speaker circuit.
4 5
UL/ULC
LISTED
S S
EOL
2
Class A (Style Z)
Figure-1: Typical 25 or 70 Vrms notification appliance circuit wiring
UL/ULC
LISTED
EOL
Class A (Style Z)
NOT NOT NOT 24VDC 24VDC

USED USED USED NAC/B NAC/A
TB1
3-ZAxx
Figure-2: Typical 24 Vdc notification appliance circuit wiring
P/N: 387463 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 3

FIELD WIRING
Backup amplifier First amplifier on circuit Second amplifier on circuit Last amplifier on circuit
3-ZAxx 3-ZAxx 3-ZAxx 3-ZAxx
TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2

BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
S S S S S S S S
Notes:
2. Backup amplifier must be rated greater than or equal to the
other amplifiers to which it is connected and be installed in
the same enclosure.
3. Backup amplifier wiring must be rated greater than or equal to
field wiring used on amplifiers connected to the backup amplifier.
Figure-3: Typical backup amplifier wiring
3-ZAxx 3-ZAxx
TB2 TB2
Warning: 3-ZAxx amplifiers must
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
be configured for 25 Vrms output.
S S S S
Class A only
TB1
CH1 Out
SIGA-AAxx
UL/ULC listed 15 k! EOL CH1 In
for Class B circuits only
Class A only
CH2 Out
Notes TB3
1. Configure the 3-ZAxx audio amplifiers for 25 Vrms. UL/ULC listed 15 k! EOL CH2 In
2. A maximum of 16 SIGA-AAxx audio amplifiers may for Class B circuits only
be connected to the output of a single 3-ZAxx audio
amplifier. From Signature controller
or
3. Shield required when the audio riser wiring shares previous Signature device
the same conduit as the telephone riser.
To next
Signature device
Figure-4: Typical wiring connecting to SIGA-AAxx audio amplifier
P/N: 387463 REV: 2.0 Page 3 of 3

The 3-ZA90 zoned audio amplifier module is a key Space Requirements: 2 rail spaces
component in an emergency communication system that Frequency Response: 400 Hz - 4 kHz at -3 dB
consists of audible notification appliances (speakers only). Harmonic Distortion: < 7%
The 3-ZA90 provides the following: Audio Circuit
Input: 8-channel, multiplexed digitized audio
• 90 watts of power
Wiring: Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z)
• standard output line levels of 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms Output: 90 W at 25 or 70 Vrms
• a 1 kHz temporal (3-3-3) tone to use as an evacuation EOL resistor: 15 kΩ
signal in the event of a fault in the audible notification Wiring
appliance circuit Termination: Wiring connects to removable terminal block
Max wire size: 12 AWG (2.5 mm sq)
In addition, the 3-ZA90 provides connections and mounting Note: Refer to the Installation and Service Manual for
brackets for two control/display modules. maximum allowable wire lengths.
The 3-ZA90 zoned audio amplifier module requires two Operating Environment
spaces on the rail chassis assembly. Temperature: 32 - 120 °F (0 - 49 °C)
Humidity: 93% RH, non-condensing at 32 °C
Current ratings
Standby: 75 mA
Alarm: 4.98 A
JUMPER SETTINGS
JP1: Selects the amplifier signal output voltage. WARNINGS
JP2: Selects the amplifier output voltage configuration to
report to the panel controller. 1. This product contains components which are sensitive to
static electricity. Failure to follow proper handling
Note: JP1 and JP2 must be set for the same output voltage. procedures to prevent damage from electrostatic
discharge may result in equipment failure.
2. Ensure that all power is removed from the panel before
plugging unit into rail chassis assembly.
Installing the amplifier PRODUCT DIAGRAM
1. Remove all power from the panel.
2. Set configuration jumpers as required.
3. Slide the module into the required rail/slot position. Mounting
brackets
Mounting
brackets
4. Gently push the module into the connectors to ensure

good contacts. Ribbon cable Ribbon cable
connector for left connector for right
5. Secure the module to the chassis by pushing in all four control/display control/display
fasteners. module module
6. Connect field wiring. JP1
Gain control
Adjusting the amplifier output levels JP2
You must adjust the output level of all zoned amplifier Mounting
brackets
Mounting
brackets
modules in the cabinet using a specific input signal. Failure to

do so can result in damage to the amplifiers.
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
- + - + - + - +
Refer to the Installation and Service Manual and use the

procedure described in the topic Adjusting amplifier output
levels. INSTALLATION SHEET:
Notes
1. This product should only be installed in a CHAS7
containing a primary or booster power supply. 3-ZA90 Zoned Audio Amplifier
2. Do not use the gain control pot to adjust output level
except when calibrating the amplifier as described in the
Installation and Service Manual. Doing so can damage the INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387516 FILE NAME: 387516.CDR
amplifier.
REVISION LEVEL: 5.0 APPROVED BY: R. Miller
3. When using Signature Series CC1 or CC2 modules to DATE: 23AUG04 CREATED BY: M. Rimes
switch amplifier output branch circuits, a maximum of 10
modules may be connected to the output of an amplifier. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
FIELD WIRING
Notes
Zone Audio Amplifier [1] All wiring supervised and power-limited.
[2] Install listed 15 kΩ EOL resistor on last device only when wired as
Class B (Style Y) riser.
TB1
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B [3] Polarity of signal circuit shown in supervisory state.
- + - + S - + S - + [4] Shield required when audio riser shares same conduit as telephone
riser.
[5] Electrical supervision requires wire runs to be broken at each
device. Do not loop signal wires around device terminals.
[4] [6]
[6] Twisted pair not required when audio circuit riser shares conduit
exclusively with 24 Vdc NAC riser.
Class B (Style Y)
UL/ULC
S S LISTED
EOL
[2]
Class A (Style Z)
Figure 1: Typical notification appliance circuit wiring
Backup Amplifier First zone amplifier Last zone amplifier

on circuit on circuit
TB1 TB1 TB1
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
- + - + S - + S - + - + - + S - + S - + - + - + S - + S - +
Figure 2: Backup amplifier wiring Notes

[1] All wiring supervised and power-limited.
[2] Backup amplifier must be rated greater than or equal to the other
amplifiers to which it is connected and be installed in the same
enclosure.
[3] Backup amplifier wiring must be rated greater than or equal to field
wiring used on amplifiers connected to the backup amplifier.
P/N: 387516 REV: 5.0 Page 2 of 2

3-ZA95
Zoned Audio Amplifier
Product description Jumper settings

JP1: Selects the amplifier signal output voltage
Mounting Mounting
brackets brackets 25 Vrms
JP1 70 Vrms
Ribbon cable Ribbon cable
connector for left connector for right
control/display control/display
module module JP2: Selects the amplifier output voltage configuration to report
to the panel controller
Gain control
Mounting Mounting
25 Vrms
brackets brackets
JP2 70 Vrms
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
- + - + - + - +
Note: JP1 and JP2 must be set for the same output voltage.
The 3-ZA95 Zoned Audio Amplifier module is a key component
in an emergency communication system that consists of Installation instructions
audible notification appliances (speakers only). The 3-ZA95
provides the following: To install the amplifier:
• 95 watts of power 1. Remove all power from the panel.

• Standard output line levels of 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms 2. Set the configuration jumpers as required.
• A 1 kHz temporal (3-3-3) tone to use as an evacuation 3. Slide the module into the required rail/slot position.
signal and a 20 SPM tone to use as an alert signal in the
event of a failure of networked audio distribution 4. Gently push the module into the connectors to ensure
good contacts.
In addition, the 3-ZA95 provides connections and mounting
brackets for two control/display modules. 5. Secure the module to the chassis by pushing in all four
fasteners.
The 3-ZA95 zoned audio amplifier module requires two spaces
on the rail chassis assembly. 6. Connect the field wiring.
Notes
Specifications • This product should only be installed in a CHAS7
Space requirements: 2 rail spaces containing a primary booster power supply or booster
Frequency response: 400 Hz to 4 kHz at ±3 dB battery charger
Harmonic distortion: < 7% • The gain control pot should be adjusted to the desired
Audio circuit output levels using a 1KHz signal after installation. Fully
Input: 8-channel, multiplexed digitized audio counter clockwise is maximum gain and fully clockwise is
Wiring: Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z) minimum gain.
Output: 95 W at 25 or 70 Vrms
EOL resistor: 15 k • When using Signature Series CC1 or CC2 modules to
Wiring switch amplifier output branch circuits, a maximum of 10
Termination: Wiring connects to removable terminal block modules may be connected to the output of an amplifier
Max wire size: 12 AWG (2.5 mm sq)
Current ratings
Standby: 75 mA
Alarm: 5.24 A
Installation Sheet 01SEP04 P/N: 3100765 REV: 1.0

3-ZA95 - Zoned Audio Amplifier 1/2
Wiring diagrams
Typical notification appliance circuit wiring
Zone audio amplifier
TB1
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
- + - + S - + S - +
[4] [6]
Class B (Style Y)
UL/ULC
S S listed
EOL
[2]
Class A (Style Z)
Notes
1. All wiring is supervised and power-limited
2. Install a listed 15 k EOL resistor on the last device only when wired as a Class B (Style Y) riser
3. Polarity of signal circuit is shown in the supervisory state
4. Shield required when audio riser shares the same conduit as the telephone riser
5. Electrical supervision requires wire runs to be broken at each device. Do not loop signal wires around device terminals.
6. Twisted pair is not required when the audio circuit riser shares the conduit exclusively with the 24 Vdc NAC riser
Backup amplifier wiring
Backup amplifier First zone amplifier Last zone amplifier

on circuit on circuit
TB1 TB1 TB1
BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B BACK-UP NAC/A NAC/B
- + - + S - + S - + - + - + S - + S - + - + - + S - + S - +
Notes
1. All wiring is supervised and power-limited
2. Backup amplifier must be rated greater than or equal to the other amplifiers to which it is connected and must be installed in
the same enclosure
3. Backup amplifier wiring must be rated greater than or equal to the field wiring used on amplifiers connected to the backup
amplifier
P/N: 3100765 REV: 1.0 01SEP04 Installation Sheet

2/2 3-ZA95 - Zoned Audio Amplifier
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WIRE ROUTING
If a nonpower-limited source feeds the 2-CPU relay contacts, the
The 6ANN/B(-S) and the 10ANN/B(-S) are wallboxes constructed of 16
wiring must remain within this area. All other wiring shall be power-
guage steel with a textured, gray enamel finish. The wallboxes house
limited.
remote annunciator CPUs and optional modules that interface with
other network components.
Typical knockout
6ANN/B(-S)
2-CPU
The following models identify the same wallbox:
Model Mounting
Optional module
6ANN/B Surface
6ANN/B-S Semi-flush
Typical knockout
10ANN/B(-S)
2-CPU
The following models identify the same wallbox:
Model Mounting
10ANN/B Surface Optional module
10ANN/B-S Semi-flush
Earth ground connection

DIMENSIONS
See Detail.
6ANN/B(-S) 1
Semi-flush
3
14.48 in (36.78 cm) 2
6
3
2.75 in (6.99 cm)
16.1 in (40.9 cm)

4
13.19 in 12.1 in
(33.5 cm) (30.7 cm)
Detail
1 Ground Strap
2
2 Wallbox 3 1
3 Ground Lug 3
4 Typical Knockout 6
Surface mount 4
5 Earth Ground Wire 5
16.1 in (40.9 cm) 6 Outer Door
2.75 in (7.0 cm)
INSTALLATION SHEET:
6ANN/B(-S) and 10ANN/B(-S)

Remote Annunciator Cabinet Wallboxes
13.19 in
(33.5 cm) REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: K. Patterson
DATE: 07DEC99 CREATED BY: B. Graham

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
DIMENSIONS
10ANN/B(-S)
Semi-flush
23.86 in (60.60 cm)
2.75 in (6.99 cm)
25.47 in (64.7 cm)
13.19 in (33.5 cm) 12.1 in (30.73 cm)
Surface mount
2.75 in (7.0 cm)
25.47 in (64.7 cm)
13.19 in (33.5 cm)
All conduit knockouts support 3/4 inch (1.9 cm) conduit.
P/N 387586 REV 1.0 Page 2 of 2

ATCK
Attack Kit for RCC7R Cabinet
Product description 7. Place the ATCK cover onto the cabinet and lock the
four key locks.
8. Using the fourteen 10-32 screws provided, attach
the cover. Make sure to observe proper placement
of the one-inch and two-inch screws. (See Figure 1.)
2 in 1 in 2 in
2 in 2 in
2 in 2 in
Key hole locks

2 in 2 in
For some security applications, the RCC7R cabinet

requires an attack-proof kit. The ATCK provides a two-
minute attack delay time.
The ATCK lets you replace the standard, hinged outer 2 in 2 in
door with a steel cover that has no window. The cover
attaches to the RCC7R with hardened steel screws and
front corner locks. 1 in 1 in 1 in
The ATCK also includes special knockout plugs that

Figure 1: Screw locations
secure unused knockouts.
Specifications
Size: 23.65 x 25.85 x 3.86 in (60.07 x 65.66 x 9.80 cm)
Material: 14 gauge steel Remove unused knockout
Finish: Red textured enamel and insert knockout plug.
Key locks: 4
Screws:
10-32 x 1 in machine screws: 4
10-32 x 2 in machine screws: 10
Compatible with 3-RCC7R cabinet only
1. Disconnect all power before installing.
2. Remove the existing door from the cabinet. Figure 2: Knockout plug
3. Place the ATCK cover over the cabinet and lock the
four key locks. The key locks hold the cover in place. Warnings
4. Use the ATCK cover as a template to mark screw Disconnect all power before installing or drilling holes.
holes on all sides of the cabinet (fourteen holes). When drilling holes into the cabinet, make sure not to
(Newer cabinets include the screw holes.) drill into any existing wires or hardware.
5. Remove the cover and drill all marked holes with a
1/4-inch drill bit.
6. Remove any unused knockouts and insert knockout
plugs. (See Figure 2.)

ATCK - Attack Kit for RCC7R Cabinet 1/1
CDR-3
Bell Coder
Product description To mount the module:
1. Secure the plastic spacers to the back of the main board

with the screws and washers provided.
2. Snap the main board on the snap-top standoffs of any
half-module footprint in the enclosure.
Enclosure Enclosure
Module Module
The CDR-3 Bell Coder is a microcomputer-based module that Terminal Terminal

provides coded outputs in response to alarm conditions. The blocks blocks
CDR-3 supports systems that require march time, temporal, or
unique coded outputs in separate zones. The CDR-3 also
decodes alarm codes that are embedded in printer messages it Wiring is difficult to Wiring is easy to
receives through the RS-232 input. install and remove. install and remove.
Specifications Snap-top standoff
Input voltage: 24 Vdc

Supervised tone outputs (isolated)
Output impedance: 1.2 k
Output voltage: 3.5 Vrms
EOL: 10 k Plastic
Tone outputs spacer
Types: Temporal (3-3-3), March time (20 or 120 bpm), and Screw
Coded
Signal: 1 kHz, 10 Vrms Washer
Dry contact (coded output) Main board
Output rating: 30 Vdc at 4 A, max (PF 0.35); 25 Vrms at
100 W, max; 70 Vrms at 100 W, max
March time: 20 or 120 bpm
Normal coding range: 4 or 6 rounds, 1-4 digits, 0-9 and
A-Z each (representing codes between 0 and 35)
Extended coding range: 4 or 6 rounds, 1-3 digits; 1 digit: Enclosure
0-70; 2 digits: 0-9 and A-Z each
PSNI queue: Last 50 alarms Figure 1: Mounting the CDR-3
RS-232 input baud rates: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
Mounting: Standard, half-module footprint Printer notes
Maximum wire size: 14 AWG (1.5 sq mm)
If you install the CDR-3 into a system that includes a printer:
Installation instructions • Program both devices as enabled

• Connect the devices to separate ports (if available) or use
Electrical safety an IOP3A to provide a second connection point
• When using an IOP3A, connect the CDR-3 to the
supervised set of terminals (refer to the IOP3A installation
WARNING: Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or
sheet for wiring details)
removing components. Failure to do so may result in serious
• When both devices share a single port, program both
injury or loss of life.
devices for the same baud rate
Caution: Observe static-sensitive material handling practices. Jumper settings

Use Figure 2 to locate LEDs and jumpers on the CDR-3. Use
Mounting the CDR-3
Figure 3 to set the jumpers for the desired relay operation.
Figure 1 shows how to mount the CDR-3 to snap-top standoffs.
You can also mount it to regular mounting studs. In any case,
mount the CDR-3 terminals away from the enclosure corners.

CDR-3 - Bell Coder 1/3
JP1 Table 3: Daughter board terminals (TB1)
D4 CDR-3 JP2
D5 D2 D1 Terminal Name Function
D3
Daughter board Main board
9 and 10 TRBL OUT Module trouble relay (contacts
DIP switch close on trouble)
11 and 12 CODED TONE Coded tone output (10 k EOL
required)
Figure 2: LEDs and jumpers
NC NO
Bell Code output relay normally-open Daughter board Main board
JP1
Bell Code output relay normally-closed
NC NO
Temporal output relay normally-open
JP2 TB1-1 through TB1-12 TB1-1 through TB1-7
Temporal output relay normally-closed
Figure 3: Jumper settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LED status Power-limited [1]
Table 1: CDR-3 LEDs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112
LED Color Status TB1
D1 Red Bell code relay active Supervised [2] Supervised

D2 Red Temporal relay active
Power-limited [1]
D3 Red Duration relay active
D4 Yellow Module trouble Notes
D5 Green Power on [1] Use power-limited wiring if the source is power-
limited. If the source is nonpower-limited, maintain a
space of 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring.
Terminal functions and wiring Otherwise, use FPL, FPLP, FPLR, or an equivalent in
accordance with the National Electric Code.
You can find information about CDR-3 wiring applications in
the Installation and Service Manual for your system. [2] Earth ground
Table 2: Main board terminals (TB1) Figure 4: Terminal wiring

Terminal Name Function
1, 2, and 3 DURATION Duration relay contacts Code formats
4 and 5 TEMPORAL March time code output Configure the code format by setting the DIP switches on S1.
contacts See “DIP switch settings,” below. Extended digit formats let you
send more than 35 pulses by adding the value of two digits.
6 and 7 BELL CODE Coded output contacts
Code format guidelines
• For unique alarm codes, each digit can be any value

Table 3: Daughter board terminals (TB1)
between 0-9 and A-Z (representing codes between 0 and
Terminal Name Function 35)
• For extended digit formats, the two added digits can have
1 and 2 TEMPORL March time or temporal tone any values that add up to the desired value, to a maximum
TONE output signal (10 k EOL of 70
required) • For a pause, set the corresponding digit to zero
3 EARTH GRND Earth ground Table 4: Code format examples
4 24V + 24 Vdc power input
Code format Input Output Coded output
5 and 6 COMMON DC common
Normal operation 1234 1234 1 pulse, 2 pulses,
7 RS232 INPUT RS-232 input 3 pulses, 4 pulses
8 PRINT SUPV Printer supervision

2/3 CDR-3 - Bell Coder
Extended first digit 1234 0334 Pause, 3 pulses,
(adds digits 1 and 2) 3 pulses, 4 pulses
Extended second digit 1234 0154 Pause, 1 pulse,
Extended third digit 1234 0127 Pause, 1 pulse,
DIP switch settings

Signal rate settings
ON S1-1 S1-2 Description

OFF OFF Temporal tone (3-3-3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON March tone - slow (20 bpm)
OFF ON March tone - fast (120 bpm)
Round selection
ON S1-3 Description
ON 4 rounds
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF 6 rounds
Code format settings

OFF OFF Normal, 4-digit code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON OFF Extended first digit
OFF ON Extended second digit
ON ON Extended third digit
Parity settings
ON S1-6 Description
OFF Even parity
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON No parity
Baud rate settings

OFF OFF 1200 baud
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF ON 2400 baud
ON OFF 4800 baud (factory default)
ON ON 9600 baud

CDR-3 - Bell Coder 3/3
Control/LED Displays
Product description Current Requirements

Standby current: 2.0 mA (base) + 1.5 mA/LED ON @ 24 Vdc
Alarm current: 2.0 mA (base) + 1.5 mA/LED ON @ 24 Vdc
Mounting: Front of any LRM except the 3-CPU panel controller
1. Fill out the identification label and insert it between the front
membrane and the circuit board.
Display
Installation
Label
3-24R 3-12SG 3-12/S1GY 3-6/3S1G2Y
3-24Y 3-12SR 3-12/S1RY 3-6/3S1GYR
3-24G 3-12SY 3-12/S2Y
3-12RY
The Control/LED Displays provide additional operator interface

capability for the EST3 network as individual, designer assignable
LEDs and touch-pad switches. Control/LED displays mount any
module's hinged front panel, except for the 3-CPU module. All
Control/LED displays are compatible with the lamp test function.
LED display models 3-24x and 3-12RY provide 24 LEDs. Adjacent to
each LED is a slip-in label for LED function identification. A typical
application is zone annunciation.
2. Mount the display in the recess on the front of the module. Secure
Control/LED display models 3-12/SG, 3-12/SR, and 3-12/SY provide the display to the module with the four supplied plastic rivets.
12 LEDs, each grouped with one switch. Adjacent to each LED-switch
is a slip-in label for LED-switch function identification. A typical
application is monitoring and control of auxiliary systems.
Control/LED display models 3-12/S1GY, 3-12/S1RY, and 3-12/S2Y
provide 24 LEDs. Each pair of LEDs is grouped with one switch.
Adjacent to each LED-switch group is a slip-in label for LED-switch
function identification. A typical application is monitoring and control of
auxiliary systems.
Control/LED display models 3-6/3S1G2Y and 3-6/3S1GYR provide 18
LEDs. Each triad of LEDs is grouped with three software-interlocked
switches. Adjacent to each LED-switch group is a slip-in label for LED-
switch function identification. A typical application is "Hand-Off-Auto"
HVAC control.
A blank faceplate is supplied with each module when no display is used.
Specifications 3. Connect the display ribbon cable (P/N 250186) between

connector P1 on the display and connector P1 on the module.
Model LED configuration Switch configuration
3-24R 24 red None
3-24Y 24 yellow None
3-24G 24 Green None
3-12RY Red-over-yellow pairs None
3-12SG 12 green 12 Ribbon Cable
3-12SR 12 red 12 P/N 250186
3-12SY 12 yellow 12 Faceplate connector

3-12/S1GY 12 green-over-yellow pairs 12 on module
3-12/S1RY 12 red-over-yellow pairs 12 Connector pins on
3-12/S2Y 24 yellow 12 rear of faceplate
3-6/3S1G2Y 6 green-over-yellow-over 6 triads

yellow triads
3-6/3S1GYR 6 green-over-yellow-over-red 6 triads
triads

Control/LED Displays 1/1
PRODUCT INFORMATION OPERATIONS
The CR-5355 reader is a self-contained proximity reader, used with Access Cards are to be presented to the front of the Reader. The
Access Control Systems. The antenna and all associated electronics LED is red when the unit is ready to read an ID card. The LED turns
are assembled in a polycarbonate housing. The two piece enclosure green and the Reader's internal beeper is activated for ¼ second to
has a rubber gasket that seals the pieces together and a cable fitting indicate the Reader read the card. The card data is next passed to
that seals the cable entry. The water-resistant unit is approved for the CRC using the Wiegand interface. Refer to the CRC technical
outdoor use. The enclosure is designed to fit on a single gang documentation for additional features.
electrical box. The Reader contains a micro-controller unit that
controls a RF field that is generated at 125kHz. The Reader has a
sensitive receiver circuit that detects ID card data and passes it along
to the micro-controller for decoding. A bi-color LED and audible tone
enhance user feedback. A tamper switch feature is available that will
alert the Card Reader Controller (CRC) when the enclosure is
NOTES
opened. An internal DIP switch makes the configuration of the
outputs, audible tone, keypad and LED control options simple. 1) A pair of 22 AWG cable is required for the tamper switch. Follow
the CRC install sheet. The "end of line" resistors may be
mounted in the enclosure. Use extreme care and shield any bare
wire from the printed circuit assembly and its components.
2) The inner diameter of the cable fitting will accommodate a cable
with an outer diameter of .300 inches (nominally).
3) Connect cable shield by connecting drain wire to ground. Leave
foil and drain wire disconnected at CRC end of cable by cutting
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS them off at the end of the cable jacket.
4) This Installation Sheet gives recommended installation
1) Determine a mounting position. Install a single or double gang procedures. All local state and national electrical codes take
electrical box or drill the appropriate mounting for #6 fasteners. If precedence.
mounting to a metal surface, drill two 7/64 (.109) inch holes and
use the enclosed self-tapping screws for mounting (see drill
template). Route the interface cable from the Reader to the
CRC. Check all electrical codes for proper cable installation.
2) Pry off the center faceplate by placing a thin blade into the grove PRODUCT DIAGRAM
that outlines the face of the Reader. The faceplate is attached by
friction only. Loosen the four screws to open the enclosure (the
enclosure screws are captive to the cover).
3) Install the cable fitting on the rear of the Reader. Feed the cable
through the cable fitting, tighten the fitting nut so the cable jacket
is flush with the printed circuit board. Dress the cable conductors
and connect the Reader to the CRC according to the CRC
installation sheet. The descriptions are on the PCB guard in the
Reader. Connect the drain line of the shield to terminal 2 (Power TM
Supply Ground). The opposite end (CRC) of the drain line

should be cut flush with the jacket and left disconnected.
4) If tamper feature is desired, connect the tamper switch to one of
the 2 CRC loops. The switch is a single pole, double throw.
When the inner reader cover is removed, the tamper switch is
released. The TB1 connections to the tamper switch are pins 10
and 11. Pin 10 is the common contact of the switch and pin 11 is
either the normally open or closed. Jumper P3 selects the
contact of the tamper switch, either the normally closed or the
normally open contact. For normally open set P3 across pins 1
and 2 (default). For normally closed set P3 across pins 2 and 3.
Normally open and normally closed refer to the Pin 11 status
while cover is off. The contacts are rated for 100 mA at 35 Vdc.
5) Mount the base of the Reader to the box or surface using the
two holes located on the center axis of the reader. Two #6-32 x 1
inch screws are provided for mounting to a box or metal surface.
6) Set the DIP switches according to the DIP switch settings table.
7) Place the jumper on P1 between pins 1 and 2 when mounting to
INSTALLATION SHEET
a metallic surface or to a junction box with a metal cover plate.
Otherwise, the jumper should be between pins 2 and 3 (default).
8) After wiring the Reader and CRC, the Reader is ready to be
tested. Power up the Reader and the LED and Beeper will signal
CR-5355
3 times (two short delays and one long delay). This indicates
that the micro-controller unit is working properly. Present an EST
Proximity Reader
construction ID card to the Reader and the LED should turn
green, indicating a verification of the card and should unlock
door. INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 3100113 FILE NAME: 3100113.CDR
9) Replace the top cover and faceplate. REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Tucker
DATE: 17JUL00 CREATED BY: S. Hawes

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Switch 1-1 Hardware Identity: When set in the "on" position the unit is configured for "Wiegand" interface. The "off" position configures the unit for
"Clock and data" interface.
Switch 1-2 Audible Tone Control: The Audible Tone (Beeper) may be enabled or disabled to sound when an access card is read. When enabled, the
audible tone is sounded when a card is successfully read. When the Beeper is disabled, the only method to activate the Beeper is to use the
external Beeper control line. The Beeper will turn on when the control line is switched to ground. Switch 2 in the "on" position enables the
audible tone (the default).
Switch 1-3 Green LED Control: The Green LED can be configured to turn on, or not turn on when an access card is read. Switch 3 in the "off"
position selects the Green LED to be turned on (the default).
Switch 1-4 Keypad Operation: Not applicable
Switch 1-5 Single / Dual LED Control: In Single LED Control the LED is Red. When an access card is read, the LED toggles Green, and then back
to Red. Grounding the Green LED Control line will change the LED from Red to Green. The Reader maybe configured so the Green LED is
externally controlled independently from the Red LED. This is referred to as Dual LED Control. When the Red or Green LED Control line is
switched to ground, the respective LED is turned on. Switch 5 should be in the on position to select dual LED control.
Switch 1-6 and 1-7 Data Output Biasing: The data outputs may be configured as open collector or biased at 5 Vdc through 1 kOhm resistors by the
reader. The default (standard) configuration is output biasing, with switches 6 and 7 "on". Refer to access control technical documentation
when supervising an inside/outside reader combination.
on
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Default Settings for CRC

1-8 Not used on
1-7 Wiegand Data 0 Bias on
1-6 Wiegand Data 1 Bias on (Wiegand data outputs are pulled up to +5 Vdc through a 1 kOhm resistor)
1-5 Single/Dual LED CNTL off (Turn on to enable dual LED control)
1-4 Key Pad on (The keypad data is sent on data lines), N/A for D version)
1-3 Green LED Control off (The green LED is enabled when a card is read)
1-2 Beeper Control on (The beeper is enabled when a card is read)
1-1 Hardware Identity on (Identifies the unit to be "Wiegand")
SPECIFICATIONS
Read Distance Option D Buffered Direct Connect Keypad
Over all Operating Limits, minimum (@12 Vdc): 5.0 inches (12.7 Operating Voltage Range (+dc): 10 Vdc -26 Vdc
cm) Input Voltage (Maximum Data 0/1 Lines): 14 Vdc
Non-Metallic Mounting, typical (@12 Vdc): 8.0 inches (20.3 cm) Input Voltage (Maximum Interface Lines): 14 Vdc
Mounted on Metal, typical (@12 Vdc): 5.5 inches (14 cm) Operating Parameters
Environmental Characteristics Excitation Frequency: 125 KHz
Operating Temperature Range: -30oC to 65oC (-22oF to 150oF) Duty Cycle (alternate power level rate): 20% @ 60mS period
Storage Temperature Range: -40oC to 85oC (-40oF to 185oF) Read and Report Speed (26 bit Wiegand Card): 175mS
Operating Humidity Range: 5% to 95% non-condensing Maximum Cable Distance to CRC: 500 feet (152 meters)
Operating Vibration Limit: .04 g2/Hz 20-2000Hz LED Type: Bi-colored Red/Green
Operating Shock Limit: 30 g, 11mS, Half Sine LED Operation (CRC control of red/green): <.5 V on LED control
Weight: 11.3 oz (310 gms) line
Dimensions: 5. inches (12.7 cm) x 5. inches (12.7 cm) x 1 inch Beeper Operation (CRC control): <.5 V on beeper line
(2.54 cm) LED Control (default): internal/single
Power Requirements Beeper Control (default): Beeper enabled
Power supply: Linear type recommended Wiegand Data Pulse Widths (default): 40uS
Operating Voltage Range (+dc): 10 Vdc -28.5 Vdc Wiegand Data Interval (default): 2mS
Maximum Average Current 12 V: 90 mA
Transient Protection (all terminals): UL 294
Reverse Voltage Protection: YES
Input Voltage (maximum data-0/1 lines): 28.5 Vdc
Input Voltage (maximum interface lines): 28.5 Vdc
WIRING CONNECTIONS
+DC Ground Data0 Data1 Shield Green Red Beeper Hold Tamper Tamper
Ground LED LED Not Used Common Select
Red Black Green White Drain Orange Brown Yellow Blue --- ---
P/N: 3100113 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 3

DRILL TEMPLATE FOR CR-5355 READER
P1
TB1 123
1 - DC + TM
2 - GND
3 - DATA "0"
4 - DATA "1"
5 - DATA RTN 3.28" (8.33cm)
If no electrical box
7/64 (.109) inch
6 - Green LED
diameter hole 7 - Red LED 5.00" (12.7cm)
8 - Beeper
9 - Hold
10 - COM
11 - Tamper
TAMPER SW
1 - n/o SW1
3 - n/c P2
TM
5.00" (12.7cm)
1.00" (2.54cm)
P/N: 3100113 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 3

The CR-5365 Reader is a self-contained proximity Reader, used with Access Cards are to be presented to the front of the Reader. The
are assembled in a polycarbonate housing. The Reader contains a green and the Reader's internal beeper is activated for ¼ second to
micro-controller unit that controls a RF field that is generated at 125 indicate the Reader read the card. The card data is next passed to
kHz. The Reader has a sensitive receiver circuit that detects ID card the CRC using the Wiegand interface. Refer to the CRC technical
data and passes it along to the micro-controller for decoding. The documentation for additional features.
Reader output is configured in the "Wiegand" style electrical
interface. The Reader has a single Bicolor LED that will emit red,
green or amber colors. Installation of the CR-5365 Reader consists of
mounting the Reader and connecting the cable to the Card Reader NOTES
Controller (CRC) via the Pigtail.
1) Wiegand - +DC, Ground, Shield Ground, Data0 and Data1 are
required for Wiegand Operation. All others (Green LED, Red
LED, Beeper and Hold) are optional.
2) The recommended cables are Alpha 1296C, 1297C and 1299C
that are six, seven and nine conductors respectively. Larger wire
SPECIFICATIONS gauges are acceptable. The wire must be stranded with an
overall shield, either foil or braided.
3) The Cable shield should be left floating at the CRC end of the
Read Distance
cable. This configuration is the best for shielding the reader
Overall Operating Limits (12 Vdc - minimum): 4.0 inches (10.2 cable from external interference and reducing the likelihood of
cm) the Reader causing interference.
Non-Metallic Mounting (12 Vdc - typical): 5.0 inches (12.7 cm) 4) This Installation Sheet gives recommended installation
procedures. All local state and national electrical codes take
Mounted on Metal (12 Vdc - typical): 5.0 inches (12.7 cm)
precedence.
Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature Range: -30oC to 65oC (-22oF to 150oF)
Storage Temperature Range: -40oC to 85oC (-40oF to 185oF) PRODUCT DIAGRAM
Operating Humidity Range: 5% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Vibration Limit: .04 g2/Hz 20-2000Hz
Operating Shock Limit: 30 g, 11mS, Half Sine
Potted Weight - Terminal Strip/Pigtail: 7.2 oz (202 gms) / 8.2 oz
(228 grms)
Dimensions: 1.7 inches (4.32 cm) X 6 inches (15.24 cm) X 1
inch (2.54 cm)
TM
Power Requirements
Operating Voltage Range (+dc): 5.1 Vdc -16.0 Vdc
Absolute Maximum (+dc non-operating): 18.0 Vdc
Maximum Average Current 12 V: 50 mA
Transient Protection (all terminals): 8,000 V
Reverse Voltage Protection
Operating Parameters
Excitation Frequency: 125 KHz
1.00"
Duty Cycle (alternate power level rate): 20% @ 60mS period
Read and Report Speed (26 bit Wiegand Card): 175mS
Maximum Cable Distance to CRC: 500 feet (152 meters) INSTALLATION SHEET
LED Type: Bi-colored Red/Green
LED Operation (CRC control of red/green): <.5 V on LED control
line CR-5365
Beeper Operation (CRC control): <.5 V on beeper line Proximity Reader
LED Control (default): internal/single
Beeper Control (default): Beeper enabled INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 3100110 FILE NAME: 3100110.CDR
Wiegand Data Pulse Widths (default): 40uS REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: R. Tucker
Wiegand Data Interval (default): 2mS DATE: 18JUL00 CREATED BY: S. Hawes

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
Installation Procedure: (excluding hazardous unit) 3) Connect the Reader and CRC together according to the wiring
connections below and the CRC installation sheet. The legend
1) Determine an appropriate mounting position for the Reader. Drill
for wiring is color-coded (according to the "Wiegand Standard")
two 3/32th inch (2.5 mm) holes for mounting the Reader to the
for the recommended cable, but marking the wires will make
surface (see Drill Template). Drill a 5/8 inch hole for the cable.
future maintenance easier.
Place a grommet around the edge of the hole. Route the
interface cable from the Reader to the CRC. Check all electrical 4) Power up the Reader and the LED and Beeper will flash and
codes for proper cable installation. beep 3 times in a sequence of two short delays and one long
delay. This indicates that the micro-controller unit is working
2) The CR-5365 comes with a Pigtail that has a 18 inch 10 -
properly. Present a EST construction ID card to the Reader and
conductor cable. To extend the cable, using recommended wire
the LED should turn green, indicating a verification of the card
splice the cable and the pigtail together and seal the splice. Trim
and should unlock the door.
and cover all conductors that are not used.
5) Mount the Reader with the provided screws when mounting onto
metal mullions. On other materials use the appropriate fastener.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
+DC Ground Data0 Data1 Shield Green Red Beeper Hold Card
Ground LED LED Not Used Present
Red Black Green White Drain Orange Brown Yellow Blue Violet
DRILL TEMPLATE FOR CR-5365 READER 2.01" (5.11 cm)

SIDE VIEW
5/8" (1.59 cm)

diameter hole
Cable
6.00" (15.24 cm)

FRONT VIEW
1.70" (4.32 cm)

(.94 cm)
.37"
3.28" (8.33 cm)
.37" (.94 cm)
P/N: 3100110 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

micro-controller unit that controls an RF field that is generated at indicate the Reader read the card. The card data is next passed to
125kHz. The Reader has a sensitive receiver circuit that detects ID the CRC using the Wiegand interface. Refer to the CRC technical
card data and passes it along to the micro-controller for decoding. documentation for additional features.
The Reader output is configured in the "Wiegand" style electrical
green or amber colors. Installation of the CR-5395 Reader consists of
mounting the Reader and connecting the cable to the Card Reader NOTES
Controller (CRC) via the Pigtail.
1) Wiegand - +DC, Ground, Shield Ground, Data0 and Data1 are
required for Wiegand Operation. All others (Green LED, Red
LED, Beeper and Hold) are optional.
2) The recommended cables are Alpha 1295C, 1296C, 1297C,
1298C and 1299C that are five, six, seven, eight and nine
conductors respectively. Larger wire gauges are acceptable. The
SPECIFICATIONS wire is to be stranded with an overall shield, either foil or
braided.
Read Distance 3) The cable shield should be connected to the Shield Ground and
Overall Operating Limits (12 Vdc - minimum): 4.00 inches (10.2 left floating at the CRC end of the cable. This configuration is the
cm) best for shielding the reader cable from external interference and
reducing the likelihood of the Reader causing interference.
Non-Metallic Mounting (12 Vdc - typical): 5.0 inches (12.7 cm)
4) This Installation Sheet gives recommended installation
Mounted on Metal (12 Vdc - typical): 5.0 inches (12.7 cm) procedures. All local state and national electrical codes take
Environmental Characteristics precedence.
Indoor and outdoor UL listed

Operating Temperature Range: -30oC to 65oC (-22oF to 150oF) PRODUCT DIAGRAM
Storage Temperature Range: -40oC to 85oC (-40oF to 185oF)
Potted Weight: 5.6 oz (157 gms)
Dimensions: 4.66 inches(11.84 cm) x 3.0 inches (7.62 cm) x .5
inch (1.27 cm)
Power Requirements
Operating Voltage Range: 4.75 Vdc -16.0 Vdc
Absolute Maximum (dc+ non-operating): 18.0 Vdc
Maximum Average Current 5 V/12 V: 40 mA/50 mA
INSTALLATION SHEET
Maximum Cable Distance to CRC: 500 feet (152 meters)
LED Type: Bi-colored Red/Green
LED Operation (CRC control of red/green): <.5 V on LED control CR-5395
line Proximity Reader
Beeper Operation (CRC control): <.5 V on beeper line
LED Control (default): internal/single
Beeper Control (default): Beeper enabled
REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Tucker
Wiegand Data Pulse Widths (default): 40uS
DATE: 18JUL00 CREATED BY: S. Hawes
Wiegand Data Interval (default): 2mS
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
1. Determine an appropriate mounting position for the Reader. Drill 4. After wiring the Reader and CRC, the Reader is ready to be
two 7/64th (.109) inch holes for mounting the Reader to the tested. Power up the Reader and the LED and Beeper will flash
surface (see Diagram Template). Drill a 3/8 to 1-inch hole for the and beep 3 times in a sequence of two short delays and one
cable. Place a grommet around the edge of the hole. Route the long delay. This indicates that the micro-controller unit is working
interface cable from the Reader to the CRC. Check all electrical properly. Present an EST construction ID card to the Reader and
codes for proper cable installation. the LED should turn green, indicating a verification of the card
2. The CR-5395 comes with a Pigtail that has a 15 inch conductor
cable. Extend the cable, using recommended cable, splice the 5. Mount the Reader with the provided screws when mounting onto
cable and the pigtail together and seal the splice. Trim and cover spacers or junction boxes. On other materials use the
all conductors that are not used. appropriate fastener.
3. Connect the Reader and CRC together according to the wiring
future maintenance easier. The color in the legend on the back
label is the color of the respective wire.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
+DC Ground Data0/ Data1/ Shield Green Red Beeper Hold Card
Data Clock Ground LED LED Not Used Present
Red Black Green White Drain Orange Brown Yellow Blue Not Used

3.32" (8.43cm)
7/64" (.28cm) diameter hole
SHIELD GROUND (DRAIN)
CARD PRESENT (VIOLET)

GREEN LED (ORANGE)
DATA1/CLOCK (WHITE)
DATA0/DATA (GREEN)
BEEPER (YELLOW)
RED LED (BROWN)
GROUND (BLACK)
5-12 VDC (RED)
HOLD (BLUE)
3.0" (7.62cm)
ELECTRICAL RATING 5-12 VDC/50mA
harmful interference, and (2) This device must

rules. Operation is subject to the following two
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM UNIT
REFER TO OPERATORS MANUAL
accept any interference received, including

conditions: (1) This device may not cause
interference that may cause undesired

FCC ID: JQ6536X
ACCESSORY
5395
operation.
LISTED
UL
8T29
R
4.66" (11.84cm)
1.68" (4.27cm)
Back View
to 1" (2.54cm)
diameter hole
3/8" ( .95cm)
P/N: 3100111 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2

micro-controller unit that controls an RF field that is generated at 125 indicate the Reader read the card. The card data is next passed to
kHz. The Reader has a sensitive receiver circuit that detects ID card the CRC using the Wiegand interface. Refer to the CRC Technical
data and passes it along to the micro-controller for decoding. The Reference Manual (P/N 3100132) for additional features.
Reader output is configured in the "Wiegand" style electrical
green or amber colors. The reader also has an internal sounder to
indicate when a card has been read successfully. Installation of the
CR-6005 Reader consists of mounting the Reader and connecting NOTES
the cable to the Card Reader Controller (CRC) via the Pigtail.
1) The recommended cable is Alpha 1295C that has five
conductors. Larger wire gauges are acceptable. The wire must
be stranded with an overall shield, either foil or braided.
2) The cable shield should be left floating at the CRC end of the
cable. This configuration is the best for shielding the reader
cable from external interference and reducing the likelihood of
the Reader causing interference.
SPECIFICATIONS 3) This Installation Sheet gives recommended installation
procedures. All local state and national electrical codes take
precedence.
Read Distance
Overall Operating Limits (12 Vdc - minimum): 2.3 inches (5.8
cm)
Environmental Characteristics PRODUCT DIAGRAM
Indoor and outdoor UL listed
Operating Temperature Range: -30oC to 65oC (-22oF to 150oF)
Storage Temperature Range: -40oC to 85oC (-40oF to 185oF)
Weight: 2.7 oz (75 gms)
Dimensions: 3.14 inches (7.98cm) x 1.7 inches (4.32 cm) x 0.51
inch (1.30 cm)
Power Requirements
TM
Operating Voltage Range: 4.75 Vdc -16.0 Vdc

Absolute Maximum (dc+ non-operating): 18.0 Vdc
Peak Current 5 V or 12 V (maximum): 60 mA
Average Current 5 V or 12 V maximum): 35 mA
INSTALLATION SHEET
Maximum Cable Distance to CRC: 500 feet (152 meters)
LED Type: Bi-colored Red/Green CR-6005
LED Control (default): internal/single Proximity Reader
Wiegand Data Pulse Widths (default): 40uS
Wiegand Data Interval (default): 2mS INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 3100112 FILE NAME: 3100112.CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Tucker
DATE: 15SEP00 CREATED BY: S. Hawes

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
Installation Procedure: 3. Connect the Reader and CRC together according to the wiring
1. Determine an appropriate mounting position for the Reader. Drill
two 5/64th (.078) inch holes for mounting the Reader to the
surface (see Drill Template). Drill a 3/8 to 1 inch hole for the
future maintenance easier. The color in the legend on the back
cable. Place a grommet around the edge of the hole. Route the
label is the color of the respective wire.
interface cable from the Reader to the CRC. Check all electrical
codes for proper cable installation. Do not secure the cover to 4. Power up the reader and the LED flashes green to red to green
the base until after testing. to red. This indicates that the micro-controller unit is working
properly. Present an EST construction ID card to the Reader and
2. The CR-6005 comes with a 18 inch Pigtail.To extend the cable,
the LED should turn green, indicating a verification of the card
using recommended wire splice the cable and the pigtail
together and seal the splice. Trim and cover all conductors that
are not used. 5. Mount the reader with the provided screws.
6. Secure the cover to the base as shown in the product diagram.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
+DC Ground Data 0 Data 1 Shield Green Red Beeper Hold Card
Ground LED LED Present
Red Black Green White Drain Orange Brown Yellow Blue Violet
BACK VIEW
1.35" (3.43cm)
3.14" (7.98cm)
2.69" (6.83cm)
DRAIN - SHIELD GROUND
WHITE - DATA 1/CLOCK
GREEN - DATA 0/DATA
ORANGE - CARD PRESENT
BLACK - GROUND
RED - 4.75 VDC TO 16 VDC
7/64" (.28cm) diameter hole
3/8" ( .95cm)
to 1" (2.54cm)
diameter hole
1.70" (4.32cm)
P/N: 3100112 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806 CRC and CRCXM
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
Card Reader Controller
Product description Wire size: 14 to 22 AWG (1.5 to 0.25 sq mm)

Power
Voltage range: 19 to 27 Vdc
Input: 24 Vdc or 16.5 Vac, 40 VA transformer
(P/N CRCXF, not included)
Reader output: 12 Vdc at 0.5 A
Lock output: 12 Vdc at 0.5 A (see wiring note 5 below)
Battery: 12 Vdc, 1.2 Ah sealed lead acid (P/N 12V1A2, not
included)
Current using 24 V riser
Standby: 940 mA max.
Active: 950 mA max.
Current using CRCXF (Class II transformer)
Standby: 135 mA at 120 Vac
Active: 135 mA at 120 Vac
Commandable Form C relay: 28 Vac/dc at 2 A (power-limited
and resistive load only)
The Card Reader Controller (CRC) module performs access Loop 1 and 2: 12 Vdc, 0.5 mA
control processing. Each CRC stores a complete database and Maximum cable distance to reader: See reader documentation
can grant or deny entry without external communication. If Communication: Security Access Control (SAC) bus (RS-485)
access is granted, the CRC applies or removes power for the SAC bus wiring
door strike or maglock. The CRC is also capable of unlocking Type: unshielded, twisted pair, > 6 twists per foot
the connected door by activating a manual push button. Maximum bus length: 4,000 ft (1,220 m) @ 25 pF/ft
Each CRC can store 8,000 (CRC) or 36,000 (CRCXM) users Maximum total capacitance: 0.1 µF
for any door and can save 5,000 (CRC) or 20,000 (CRCXM) Maximum total resistance: 52
events in a history log. The CRC supports two readers, one Maximum voltage: 10 Vdc
strike, and one door opener. The CRC can connect two input Maximum current: 250 mA
devices such as request-to-exit detectors or door contacts. Surge protector (for nonintegrated CRC installation): Ditek
model number DTK-2LVLP-D
CRCs continue to process access events even if there is a loss Operating environment
of communications or power. An internal 1.2 Ah sealed lead Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
acid battery (purchased separately) provides up to 4 hours of Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing
local standby power. The CRC includes a system-controllable
Form C relay that can be used for fire applications.
Note: For more application and installation information, refer to
the EST3 Installation and Service Manual, (P/N 270380). You’ll need the LRM removal tool (P/N 210415) to remove the
cover, a small screwdriver for terminal screws, and a standard
screwdriver to mount the back plate to the electrical box.
Specifications
Note: Leave about 1 inch of clearance at either side of the
Dimensions CRC to insert the LRM removal tool when removing the cover.
Width: 8.0 in (20.5 cm)
Height: 4.75 in (12.0 cm)
Depth: 2.5 in (6.4 cm) Surface mount, 4 in sq box, or European box
Cover removal clearance: ~1 in on either side PC board snap 2-gang electrical box PC board snap
Housing: White 94-VO thermoplastic
Capacities CRC CRCXM
Card holders: 8,000 36,000
Schedules [1]: 1,200 1,200
Holidays [1]: 1,200 1,200 CRC backplate
Access levels [1]: 1,200 1,200
History records: 5,000 20,000
[1] Maximum capacity is 255 per company.
Device support (inputs and outputs)
Readers: 2
Battery
Strikes or maglocks: 1 (This product is compatible with compartment
UL/ULC listed 12 Vdc strikes and maglocks.)
Door opener: 1 (Form C dry contact)
Input devices: 2
Compatible electrical boxes
Velcro strap attachment
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box
PC board attachment slots
Standard 4 in square x 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box
European 100 mm square box
Installation Sheet 23MAR04 P/N 387625 REV: 3.0

CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller 1 / 10
To install the CRC: 6. Attach the Velcro straps to the battery compartment.
1. Remove the cover. 7. Install the battery in the battery compartment.
2. Remove the PC board from the backplate using the snaps 8. Mount the battery insulator (provided) over the battery.
at the top of the backplate. Make sure the battery leads are covered and the battery
wires are located to the left side of the battery.
Caution: Observe static-sensitive handling procedures. 9. Secure the battery and insulator using the Velcro straps.
3. Determine the mounting location. Remember to leave 10. Connect all wiring.
clearance for cover removal.
11. Attach the cover with a right-to-left or left-to-right motion.
4. Mount the CRC backplate to a compatible electrical box. This will properly engage the tamper switch.
5. Install the PC board to the backplate. Position the board in
the slots at the bottom of the backplate, then snap it into
place with the snaps at the top of the backplate.
Wiring diagram
+ SAC bus OUT
- SAC bus OUT

+ SAC bus IN
Reader PWR
- SAC bus IN
Reader GND
GREEN LED
Strike PWR
+24 V OUT
Strike GND
-24 V OUT
Loop GND
RED LED
Loop 2 IN
Loop 1 IN
+24 V IN
Sounder
-24 V IN
Data 0
Data 1
NO
NC
TB-1
C
J1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
16.5 Vac IN 2
Security Access
16.5 Vac IN 1 Dry contact Control Bus See Application
TB-2 connections wiring diagram
From strike/maglock/ From control panel,

access relay [4] RS-485 converter,
Netcom 1S, or
To next CRC or previous device [12]
other device
To next device or 120 EOL
From power supply [9] if this is the last device on S1
From AC/Load terminals Class B or back to 3-SAC
on plug-in transformer (CRCXF) [10] module if Class A. [13]
Note: The ground terminal on the
transformer is not used. Tamper switch. Engaged when
the cover is installed and activated
Red (+) when the cover is removed.
To battery
Black (-)
Reader wire connections to CRC terminals

Reader 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
manufacturer Reader Reader Data 0 Data 1 RED LED GREEN Sounder
power [7] GND [1] [7] [1] [7] LED [2]
HID [3] Red Black Green White Brown Orange Yellow
Motorola Indala Red Black Green White Brown --- Blue
Dorado Red Black Green White Brown --- Yellow
Sensor Eng. Red Black Green White Violet Brown Blue
Keri Red Black Green White Brown Orange Blue
Radio Key Red Black Green White Brown Orange Blue
Essex Red Black Green White --- Brown ---
Mercury MR-10 Red Black Green White --- Brown Orange
P/N 387625 REV: 3.0 23MAR04 Installation Sheet

2 / 10 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller
Wiring diagram notes
Jumper setup
[1] If used as an inside reader, connect the green wire to
TB1-13 and the white wire to TB1-12.
Intermittent power Continuous power
[2] Connect the reader’s sounder wire only when the
(using strike) (using maglock or
CRCSND is not used and control of the reader’s sounder continuously powered strike)
is required.
JP1 1 2 3 Output source
[3] Program for dual-LED control.
JP2 1 2 3 Input source
[4] Use a 4.7 K , 1/4 watt resistor if no strike is being used to
maintain supervision.
AC power DC power
5. When maglock or door strike voltage or current is outside (from transformer) (from panel)
CRC(XM) operational parameters, use an accessory relay
(catalog number CRCRL) and a listed external power
supply to power the lock. Refer to the accessory relay’s
installation sheet (P/N 3100294) for more information. Wire routing
6. When wiring between CRCs goes outside a building, the • All connections, except the battery leads, are power
specified surge protector is required for the wires leaving limited. Terminals TB1-1–4 and 17–23 are supervised.
the building and for the wires entering another building.
The surge protector adds 8 ohms of resistance to the line • Battery leads must be routed under the provided insulator,
it is connected to. and must be a minimum of 1/4 inch from any other wiring
including TB2 connections or you must use FPL, FPLR, or
[7] If you are not connecting a reader, you must use two FPLP wiring.
47 K , 1/4 W resistors, one between TB1-10 and TB1-12,
and another between TB1-10 and TB1-13. • Route 16.5 Vac (TB2-1 and 2) and +24 V in/out (TB1-1
and 2) out of the CRC. Leave no excess wire in the CRC.
[8] For connection to UL/ULC listed devices. This ensures proper power limited spacing.
[9] WARNING: -24 V in must be connected to the PS/MON
-24 V even if the CRCXF is used.
[10] WARNING: The CRCXF with a battery provides 30 Power-limited wiring
minutes of access and four hours of security standby
power. The CRCXF cannot be used in a CRC designed for
the following applications: fire alarm, Local mercantile
Grade A premises, Central station Grade A, B, or C,
Proprietary Grade A or AA, or Holdup alarm.
11. When using a CRC as a muster station, the reader must
be wired as an outside reader. Nonpower-limited wiring
[12] The SAC bus must originate from a 3-SAC module in a

control panel, or from an RS-485 converter or a
NETCOM-1S Device Server on a PC running the
ACDB-KE software.
Application wiring diagrams
[13] CRCs can only be wired as class A when used with a
3-SAC module from a control panel. The CRC can be wired and powered in several ways. Each
method requires specific wiring to allow the CRCs to operate
properly.
The figures on the following pages illustrate the required
components and wiring for common applications.

[4]
24 Vdc +
24 Vdc -
Listed
power supply
Control Panel
[1] Circuit common [3]

To next
[2] CRC
... ... ...

... ... ...
2 3 4 17 18 19 20 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 2 3 4 17 18 19 20
TB-1 TB-1 TB-1
1 1 1
2 CRC/ 2 CRC/ 2 CRC/

TB-2 CRCXM TB-2 CRCXM TB-2 CRCXM
[1] 24 Vdc power supply from PPS/M [3] The -24 Vdc wire acts as the circuit common when using an additional power supply
[2] SAC bus from 3-SAC [4] Power supply must have ground fault detection circuits disabled
CRCs wired to an integrated control panel with an additional remote power supply
Circuit Optional
Control Panel common [3] +24 Vdc
[4]
[1]
To next
[2] CRC
... ... ...

... ... ...
2 3 4 17 18 19 20 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 2 3 4 17 18 19 20
TB-1 TB-1 TB-1
1 1 1
2 CRC/ 2 CRC/ 2 CRC/

TB-2 CRCXM TB-2 CRCXM TB-2 CRCXM
[1] 24 Vdc power supply from PPS/M

[2] SAC bus from 3-SAC
GND
AC
AC
[3] The -24 Vdc wire acts as the circuit common when using an additional
AC
power supply
transformer
[4] We recommended that you connect the +24 Vdc wire to all CRCs
CRCs wired to an integrated control panel with an AC transformer
[1]
24 Vdc +
24 Vdc -
Listed Circuit common [2]

power supply
Surge
protector
ACDB-KE
To next
RS-232 CRC
... ...
TD B+
GND
TD A-
... ...
2 3 4 17 18 19 20 2 3 4 17 18 19 20
Converter TB-1 TB-1
1 1
2 CRC/ 2 CRC/
TB-2 CRCXM TB-2 CRCXM
[1] Power supply may have ground fault detection disabled

[2] Connect the circuit common to the signal ground of the converter and the -24 Vdc
terminal of the listed power supply through the surge protector
[3] SAC bus, wiring as specified
CRCs wired to the ACDB-KE through a converter and powered from a remote power supply

Circuit common [1] Surge SAC bus [2] Circuit common
protector
ACDB-KE
To next
RS-232 CRC
... ...
TD B+
GND
TD A-
... ...
2 3 4 17 18 19 20 2 3 4 17 18 19 20
Converter TB-1 TB-1
1 1
2 CRC/ 2 CRC/
TB-2 CRCXM TB-2 CRCXM
[1] Connect the circuit common to the

signal ground of the converter and
the -24 Vdc terminal of the CRC
GND
AC
AC
GND
AC
AC
through the surge protector
AC AC
[2] SAC bus, wiring as specified
transformer transformer
CRCs wired to the ACDB-KE through a converter and powered from AC transformers
BA BA BT
BA BT BA
Basic Security N/C with Tamper N/O with Tamper

EOL resistors are 47 K
CRC relay terminals
Compatibility lists
Table 1: Compatible card readers

Manufacturer Model number Description
Dorado Systems 200-B (3110-2001) Mullion proximity card reader
Dorado Systems 200-G (3110-2000) Mullion proximity card reader
Dorado Systems 220-B (3310-2201) Mullion proximity/magnetic stripe card reader
Dorado Systems 220-W (3310-2200) Mullion proximity/magnetic stripe card reader
Dorado Systems 250-B (3110-2501) Wall mount proximity card reader
Dorado Systems 250-W (3110-2500) Wall mount proximity card reader
Dorado Systems 251-B (3110-2511) Wall mount proximity keypad card reader
Dorado Systems 251-W (3110-2510) Wall mount proximity keypad card reader
Dorado Systems 278 (3110-2781) Ruggedized proximity/magnetic stripe/keypad card reader
Essex Electronics KTP-102-LI Thinline 2 x 6 Keypad, 26-bit Wiegand, Black Lexan Overlay,
Illuminated, Surface or Mullion Mount, 5 or 12V
Essex Electronics KTP-103-SN 3 x 4 Keypad, 26-bit Wiegand, Stainless Steel Bezel, Non-
Illuminated, Surface or Flush Mount, 5 or 12V
HID Corporation 5355ABK0009 ProxPro™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 5355AG00 ProxPro™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 5355AGK0009 ProxPro™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 5355ABK0009 ProxPro™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 5365CBP02 MiniProx™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output

Table 1: Compatible card readers
Manufacturer Model number Description
HID Corporation 5365EBP02 MiniProx™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 5375NT MaxiProx™ extended range card reader
HID Corporation 5395CG100 ThinLine II proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 6005ABS00 ProxPoint™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 6005AKS00 ProxPoint™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 6005AWS00 ProxPoint™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 6005BBS00 ProxPoint™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 6005BWS00 ProxPoint™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 6005BKS00 ProxPoint™ proximity card reader with Wiegand output
HID Corporation 6030AGR00 ProxPro Plus™ proximity card reader
HID Corporation 6030AGS00 ProxPro Plus™ proximity card reader
KeriSystems P-300BL Cascade proximity card reader
KeriSystems P-300W Cascade proximity card reader
KeriSystems P-500BL Alps proximity card reader
KeriSystems P-500W Alps proximity card reader
Mercury Security MR-10 Mag Stripe Reader, Format Selectable (inc. 26-bit Wiegand), Die
Cast Aluminum, 12V
Motorola ARK-501+ PinProx™ proximity card reader with keypad
Motorola ASR-603 SecureProx™ I proximity card reader
Motorola ASR-605 SecureProx™ II proximity card reader
Position Technology CR-R880 Posi-Prox Proximity Card Reader
Table 2: Compatible access cards

Manufacturer Model Number Description
Wiegand access cards
HID Corporation HID Sensorcard Wiegand Card Wiegand card with HID logo
HID Corporation HID PhotoId Wiegand Card with A Wiegand card with HID logo that has space for including a
Photo [1] person’s photo.
Magnetic stripe access cards
HID Corporation 1336 DuoProx II Multiple Technology Proximity Card
Proximity access cards
EST PC-1326 Proximity access control card
EST PC-1386 ISO proximity access control card with unique EST bit format
and EST logo on back
EST PC-1386B ISO proximity access control card with unique EST bit format
and no logo on front or back
EST EST-PC Construction Card. Proximity access control card with EST logo
and unique construction code bit format
EST PK-1346 Proximity Key Fob with unique EST format
Motorola AVC-131 Multi-tech proximity access control card
Motorola APC-161 [1] Multi-tech photo ID proximity access control card

Table 2: Compatible access cards
Manufacturer Model Number Description
Motorola ASK-116 Proximity key tag
HID Corporation PK-1346 Proximity Key Fob Proximity key fob with HID logo for use with EST or HID
proximity card readers
LED control cards
Motorola 07260-001 Single and dual line LED control option card
Keri Systems 05528-702 LED mode control card
[1] A separately ordered LAM-1 Laminator is required for laminating a photo to the access card. Use a Polaroid ID3 or ID4
Camera for taking the photo.
System power calculations If the load exceeds the panel power supply capacity, you need
an additional power supply for the SAC bus devices.
Use Form A to determine the load created by SAC bus
devices. Follow the instructions given below. Add this load to Note that the SAC current load consists of the current drawn
the load created by fire alarm devices to determine the total by the CRC or KPDISP devices plus any readers, strikes, and
load for the panel power supply. maglocks.
Form A: SAC active and standby currents

Device Quantity Current draw @ Total current @ Standby Duty cycle Standby Battery
(Q) 12 Vdc (mA) 24 Vdc (mA) current (mA) (%) (DC) hours (SH) capacity (Ah)
(C1) (C2) (C3) (BC)
Strike
Maglock
Reader
CRC [1] 60
250 0 0 0 0
CRCSND 8
KPDISP 100
Active load Battery size
Derated battery size
[1] Two currents are given for the CRC. The first is normal operating current. The second is the current drawn when the battery is
being charged. The charging current should be included in the Total current calculation, but excluded from the Battery size
calculation, as indicated by the zeros.
To determine the need for additional power (Form A): Locks, readers, and CRCSNDs = (C3 = C2)
1. Fill in the quantity (Q) of each device. CRCs = (C3 = Q x 50)
2. Fill in the rated current draw at 12 Vdc (mA) (C1) for each KPDISPs = (C3 = Q x 35)
type of device used. 5. Fill in the duty cycle (as a percentage).
3. Enter or calculate the total current (mA) at 24 Vdc (C2) Example: A duty cycle of 30 seconds in every 5 minutes
using: (300 seconds) is a 10% duty cycle.
Locks = (Q x C1 x 0.98) - 5 6. Fill in the standby hours
Card readers with 12 V current draw equaling 99 mA or Standby hours are the number of hours after which lock
less = (Q x C1 x 0.98) - (55 x C1 / 100) and reader loads should be shed when operating on
Card readers with 12 V current draw over 99 mA = battery power.
(Q x C1 x 0.98) - 55 Note that load shedding of locks and readers requires
CRC, CRCSND, KPDISP = Q x C1 3-SDU programming.
4. Calculate the standby current (mA) (C3) as follows. When used for fire alarm applications, CRCs and
KPDISPs require at least 24 hours of standby power, but

readers, strikes, and maglocks can be load shed to reduce Providing adequate voltage for devices
battery requirements.
To determine whether each CRC and KPDISP will have
7. Calculate the battery capacity (BC) as follows: adequate input voltage, the voltage drops along the SAC bus
BC = (C3 x DC x SH) / 1000 can be estimated or calculated.
8. Calculate the active load by totaling total current (C2). Estimated voltage drop
9. Calculate the battery size by totaling battery capacity (BC). To estimate the voltage drop use Table 3 and Table 4, which
show the maximum length of a SAC bus for a given number of
10. Calculate the Derated battery size as follows. devices and a total load current. (One table is for 16 AWG
Derated battery size = Battery size x 1.2 wire, the other for 14 AWG wire.) (The tables are based on a
3.2 V drop.)
11. Add the Active load figure to the corresponding totals
calculated for the remainder of the system. These tables were calculated based on even spacing between
doors and an equal load at each door.
12. If the Active load is greater than the available panel supply
capacity, you must add an additional power supply. To check for adequate device voltage:
13. Use the system-wide Derated battery size to determine 1. Determine the total active current for a typical door. To do
the battery required for the panel. this, add the active current of the CRC, the active current
of the door lock, the active current of the card reader, and
the active current of the sounder (if used).
2. Determine the number of doors you need to secure.
3. In Table 3, find the intersection of the number of doors and
the load current you determined in steps 1 and 2.
This is the maximum length (in feet) of the SAC bus using
16 AWG wire.
4. If the distance from the control panel to the last device on
the SAC bus is less than this distance, no further
calculations are needed.
5. If the distance to the last device in you installation is
greater than this distance, repeat steps 1 through 4 using
Table 4.
6. If changing the gauge of the wire does not result in a
sufficient length for a single SAC, you will need to design
the system with an additional power source, then repeat
the steps. This power source may be an additional
connection to the same or another 3-PPS/M located in the
same cabinet as the 3-SAC that connects these devices,
another fire rated power supply with ground isolation, or a
CRCXF.

Table 3: Length of SAC bus using 16 AWG wire
Load current (mA)
Doors Powered by 70 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
CRCXF
1 4000 4000 4000 2650 2000 1600 1300 1140 1000 885 800 720 665 616
2 4000 3800 2660 1776 1300 1060 880 760 666 594 532 484 444 410
3 4000 2850 1950 1320 990 780 660 570 498 444 399 363 333 306
4 4000 2240 1600 1040 800 624 520 452 400 355 320 288 266 244
5 4000 1875 1350 885 650 525 435 375 333 296 266 242 222 205
6 4000 1620 1140 756 558 450 378 324 286 254 228 207 190 X
7 4000 1400 980 665 497 392 329 285 250 222 199 X X X
8 4000 1240 880 584 440 352 288 253 222 197 X X X X
9 4000 1125 810 522 396 315 261 228 200 X X X X X
10 4000 1030 730 480 360 290 240 207 X X X X X X
11 4000 946 660 440 330 264 220 X X X X X X X
12 4000 876 600 408 300 240 X X X X X X X X
13 4000 806 559 377 273 X X X X X X X X X
14 4000 756 518 350 X X X X X X X X X X
15 4000 705 495 330 X X X X X X X X X X
16 4000 672 464 304 X X X X X X X X X X
17 4000 629 442 X X X X X X X X X X X
18 4000 576 414 X X X X X X X X X X X
19 4000 570 399 X X X X X X X X X X X
20 4000 540 380 X X X X X X X X X X X
21 4000 X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Notes: All distance measurements are given in feet. X means that the 3-PPS/M will not support these devices at this distance.

Table 4: Length of SAC bus using 14 AWG wire
Load current (mA)
Doors Powered by 70 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
CRCXF
1 4000 4000 4000 4000 3000 2400 2000 1750 1500 1360 1200 1100 1000 940
2 4000 4000 4000 2700 2000 1600 1360 1160 1000 900 800 740 680 620
3 4000 4000 3000 2040 1500 1200 1020 870 750 660 600 555 510 471
4 4000 3480 2400 1600 1200 960 800 700 600 544 480 436 400 376
5 4000 2900 2000 1365 1000 800 675 575 500 455 405 365 335 315
6 4000 2460 1710 1140 870 690 582 492 438 390 348 312 X X
7 4000 2170 1505 1015 756 602 511 434 378 336 301 X X X
8 4000 1920 1360 904 680 544 448 384 336 X X X X X
9 4000 1710 1215 810 612 477 405 351 X X X X X X
10 4000 1550 1100 740 550 440 370 310 X X X X X X
11 4000 1430 1012 682 506 407 341 X X X X X X X
12 4000 1344 936 624 468 372 X X X X X X X X
13 4000 1248 858 585 429 351 X X X X X X X X
14 4000 1162 812 532 406 322 X X X X X X X X
15 4000 1095 750 510 375 X X X X X X X X X
16 4000 1024 720 480 352 X X X X X X X X X
17 4000 969 680 442 340 X X X X X X X X X
18 4000 918 630 414 X X X X X X X X X X
19 4000 874 608 399 X X X X X X X X X X
20 4000 820 580 380 X X X X X X X X X X
21 4000 X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Notes: All distance measurements are given in feet. X means that the 3-PPS/M will not support these devices at this distance.

CRCRL
CRC Accessory Relay
Product description To install the CRCRL in the CRC housing:
1. Remove the CRC cover.

2. Position the CRCRL on the left side of the battery with the
leads pointing up and the hook-and-loop patch facing the
battery, pressing the CRCRL firmly into the battery strap.
3. Connect all wiring as shown in the wiring diagram, using
power-limited wiring.
4. Attach the CRC cover.
To install the CRCRL in an electrical box:
1. Remove the CRC cover.

2. Remove the CRC backplate from the electrical box.
3. Position the CRCRL inside the electrical box.
4. Connect the CRCRL contact wires to the power supply
and door lock, as shown in the wiring diagram.
5. Pull the CRCRL control wires through the CRC backplate
hole.
6. Mount the CRC backplate on the electrical box.
The CRCRL is a fire, security, and access control accessory. 7. Connect the CRCRL control wiring as shown in the wiring
Use the CRCRL in conjunction with an external power supply diagram.
to control a device which requires voltage or current outside 8. Attach the CRC cover.
the control unit's operating range.
Wiring diagram
Specifications
CRC applications
Operating voltage: 12 Vdc
Operating current: 34 mA at 12 Vdc
Contact rating
2 A at 28 Vdc at 0.6 PF
2 A at 120/250 Vac at 0.6 PF
Dimensions
Width: 0.8 in (2.0 cm)
Height: 1.8 in (4.6 cm)
Depth: 1.2 in (3.1 cm)
Temperature: 32–120 °F (0–49 °C)
Humidity: 93% RH, non-condensing
Leads
Free length: 6.0 inches (15.25 cm)
Wire: 18 AWG stranded, tinned
Insulation: 0.03 in (0.76 cm) minimum
CRC applications
When used with power-limited wiring, the CRCRL can be
mounted inside the CRC housing. When used with nonpower-
limited wiring the CRCRL must be mounted in an electrical
box. You can use the electrical box the CRC is mounted on.

CRCRL - CRC Accessory Relay 1/1
CRCSND
CRC Sounder
Product description Wiring diagram

To TB1-5 (Strike PWR)
on card reader controller module
To TB1-16 (Sounder)
on card reader controller module
Either terminal
connection can
+
be used
+
+
The sounder is a small horn that mounts inside the card reader
controller module. The sounder operates if an emergency exit
door is opened without an exit request and locally indicates
that a door has been left open.
Note: This device is for supplementary use only.
Specifications
Operating voltage: 12 Vdc
Operating current: 7 mA
o o
Relative humidity: 93% @ 104 F (40 C)
o o
Temperature: 32 - 120 F (0 - 49 C)
1. Remove power from the card reader controller module.
2. Remove the card reader controller cover.
3. Snap the sounder into the molded brackets in the card
reader controller cover.
Card Reader Controller

module cover
Sounder mounted in cover
4. Connect all wiring from the sounder to the card reader

controller. Refer to the wiring diagram below.
5. Install the card reader controller cover.
6. Apply power to the card reader controller module.

CRCSND - CRC Sounder 1/1
GFD
Ground Fault Detector
Product description Jumper setup
A trouble is sent to a
monitoring module or circuit A ground fault is placed on
(the relay contacts on the the monitoring circuit
GFD change state) (i.e. fire alarm panel)
JP1
3 2 1
When JP1 is in the 1-2 position, the GFD connects the COM
output (terminal 3 of the terminal block) to earth ground
The GFD Ground Fault Detector is used to detect ground faults through a 1 kΩ resistor. The COM output can be connected to
on power-limited isolated circuits. The GFD provides ground the minus side of the input power or supervisory module so
fault monitoring for up to two isolated signals. A ground fault on that a ground fault can be transferred to the panel.
any wire is detected within 20 seconds. Built-in relay contacts
are available for indicating trouble and ground fault conditions,
or the GFD can be configured to put a ground fault on the Installation instructions
monitoring circuit. Note: The GFD is shipped from the factory as an assembled
The GFD is a stand-alone unit. Its dry contacts can be unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be
monitored by other system input devices. The GFD also has a disassembled.
watchdog circuit, which keeps the relay energized. To install the module:
Specifications 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
ground faults.
Operating voltage range: 10 to 28 Vdc
Current draw: 110 mA 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
Trouble contact rating: 1 A @ 30 Vdc (resistive) diagram.
Ground fault detection: < 20 seconds (up to 10 kΩ) 3. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw
Ground fault monitoring: 2 circuits, 2 wires (every 16 seconds) provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) 4. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
Humidity: 0 to 93% RH (noncondensing) provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
Construction: High impact engineering polymer Notes
Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
2-gang cover
LED outputs
The GFD has two yellow LEDs. The LEDs indicate which
circuit pair and which conductor pair has a ground fault. The
LEDs light to indicate which conductors have a ground fault.
• Ground fault on conductor 1: LED 1 ON steady
• Ground fault on conductor 3: LED 2 ON steady
Note: When a 3-NSHM is used, the following takes place:
• Ground fault on conductor 1 or 2: LED 1 ON steady
• Ground fault on conductor 3 or 4: LED 2 ON steady
Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387630 REV: 3.0

GFD - Ground Fault Detector 1/2
Wire stripping guide
1/4 in (~6 mm)
Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
connect to the terminal block of the module.
Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.

Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection
Wiring diagram
Pair one in +
+ Pair one out
Pair two in + + Pair two out
16 15 14 13 3-2-1 12 11 10 9
IN OUT JP1 IN OUT
Circuit pair 1 Circuit pair 2
LED1 LED2
Earth Trouble/GF Contacts
GND Power NC COM NO
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
To earth ground To supervisory module

Polarity is not important or traditional zone card
[4] [3]
From UL/ULC listed
24 Vdc fire alarm panel
[4]
Notes [4] Use a UL/ULC listed end-of-line device for complete

supervision. Contacts cannot be used for nonpower-
1. All circuits are power-limited and supervised. (See Note 4 limited applications unless all wiring is type FPL, FPLR, or
below.) FPLP.
2. Contacts 1 and 7 are not used
[3] The functionality of the Trouble/GF circuit is dependent on
the position of JP1. See “Jumper setup” for details.
P/N: 387630 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/2 GFD - Ground Fault Detector
The IOP3A isolator card is designed to electrically isolate
a fire alarm control panel's RS-232 ports from peripheral Current Requirement 60mA
devices. The IOP3A provides two isolated RS232
connections, as well as a DB9 and RJ12 connector for
downloading. A select mode allows both a printer and
modem to be connected when used on EST2 systems.
JUMPER SETUP
The IOP3A should be used in ALL applications which
require the connection of external devices (CCA, CGP, JB1 1-2 Select Mode
VDU, and external modems) to properly isolate the fire 2-3 Supervision Mode
alarm control panel from earth ground conne ctions.
JB2 IN Output #1 supervision disable / (+) 12VDC
on TB2-1
OUT Output #1 supervision enable (TB2)
JB3 IN Output #2 supervision disable / (+) 12VDC

INSTALLATION on TB3-1
OUT Output #2 supervision enable (TB3)
The IOP3A module requires 1/2 standard module
footprint. JB4 IN Supervision Mode
OUT Select Mode
FIELD WIRING:
NOTE: JB1 and JB4 settings must agree.
To Control Module:
IRC-3 Printer Mode: FireWorks Mode:
TB1-1 (+) 24VDC JB1 2-3 IN JB1 2-3 IN
TB1-2 (-) 24VDC JB2 IN JB2 IN
TB1-3 Port Selection/Supervision JB3 IN JB3 IN
TB1-4 Common JB4 IN JB4 IN
TB1-5 RXD IN P1 on 2-MCM OUT
TB1-6 TXD OUT RDU Mode:
JB1 1-2 IN
JB2 OUT
To Peripheral Device: JB3 OUT
TB2/3-1 Supervision / (+) 12VDC JB4 OUT
TB2/3-2 Common P1 on 2-MCM IN
TB2/3-3 TXD OUT
TB2/3-4 RXD IN
Notes:
1. When in RDU mode, TB2 must be used for the
modem and TB3 must be used for a printer.
IOP3A
2. All RS-232 connections should be within the same
room or within 50 feet of the fire panel they are JB1
JB4 RS232 #1 OUT
SUPVCOMTXD RXD
connected to.
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB1 UP SW1 1 2 3 4
JB2 TB2
JB3 TB3
+ - SUPV RXD TXD 1 2 3 4
COM
24VDC OUT IN OUT

PROGRAM
RS232 IN
SWITCH SETUP SUPVCOMTXD RXD

RS232 #2 OUT
SW1 UP Outputs 1 and 2 enabled. RJ12 and

DB9 connectors disabled. INSTALLATION SHEET:
IOP3A
DOWN Download setting. RJ12 and DB9 Isolator RS-232 Card
connectors enabled. Outputs 1 and 2
disabled.
REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: D.P.
Note diagram below for UP and DOWN switch DATE: 10/04/99 CREATED BY: DRM
positions.
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
APPLICATION DRAWINGS
IOP3A to CM motherboard wiring IOP3A to 3-CPU1 wiring
3-CPU1 Panel controller

TB1
+24 VDC R C R C
24VDC OUT
+
P1 R T T O R T T O
X X S M X X S M
COMMON
- SUPV
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
RS232 IN
IOP3A
3
TB1
COM
TB2
4
1
RXD TXD
IN OUT
TB1
P3 P4
3
6
JB1
24VDC OUT
+
1
4
24 Vdc
UP SW1
1
2
3
- SUPV
PROGRAM
2
Switch shown in 6
3
7
UP position.
COM
4
8
RXD TXD
IN OUT
5
9 J1
6
10
JB1
UP SW1
JB4
1
2
3
PROGRAM
P7
J2 Switch shown in
UP position.
CM Motherboard
IOP3A
JB2 INSTALLED
(PROVIDES 12V TO POWER MODEM)
GREEN GREEN GREEN

JB3
JB2
SUPVCOMTXD RXD
SUPVCOMTXD RXD
RS232 #2 OUT
RS232 #1 OUT
1
BLACK BLACK BLACK

2
WHITE RED RED

3
RED WHITE WHITE

JUMPER 4-5
4
4
TB3
TB2
JUMPER 7-8 JUMPER 6, 8, 20

PIN 1 20 PIN 1
NOTE: The IOP3A JUMPER 1,4,6 2 3 4 5 7 8 7 3 2
must be configured PIN 1
in supervision mode.
DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION PRINTER CONFIGURATION
DB-9 FEMALE DB-25 FEMALE DB-25 MALE
IOP3A to 2-MCM(N) wirng
Power Limited
Not supervised
TB1
24VDC OUT
+
TB3 TB3
- SUPV
NAC SMOKE/AUX
3
POWER POWER
COM
4
RXD TXD
IN OUT
NAC NAC JB1 on 1-2

6
POWER POWER
JB1
UP SW1
1
2
3
PROGRAM
Switch shown in
UP position.
2-PPS/6A 2-PPS
JB4
NOTE: The RTS line is

connected only when the RS-232 IOP3A
IOP3A is used in Select TXD
Mode.
RXD
RTS Note:
JB3
JB2
SUPVCOMTXD RXD
SUPVCOMTXD RXD
When in RDU mode,

RS232 #2 OUT
RS232 #1 OUT
1
COM TB2 on the IOP3A must

2
be used for the modem and

3
TB3 must be used for a

2-MCM(N)
4
4
TB3
TB2
printer.
P/N: 270758 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2

KPDISP
Keypad Display
Product description Internal processing

An internal processor drives the LCD display in response to
system messages and user input. Menu screens let the user
view information or choose commands. In addition, the
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
processor shows context-sensitive help screens to support the
RESPONDING TO ALARMS
Fire: three short beeps followed by a long pause. Notify the Fire Department.
Phone: __________________________________________
user.
Security: steady tone. Notify the Police Department.
Phone: __________________________________________
The system programmer defines which menu commands are

Supervisory o r trouble: steady beeps. Notify your service company.
Phone: __________________________________________
Account: __________________________________________
available on a user-by-user basis. Users are granted or denied

SILENCING ALAR MS
When it is safe to enter the building and only when instructed by the authority
having jurisdiction, enter your password and execute the correct commands.
Fire: Choose Reset /Silence then Silence Alarms.
Burglary: Choose Disarm Security, select the partition in alarm, then choose
Disarm.
Supervisory o r trouble: Choose Reset/Silence then Silence Panel.
access to any partition controlled by a KPDISP.
OT HER F UNCTIONS
For more detailed instructions of these commands, and for descriptions of all
The module can annunciate and report tampering or loss of

other commands, refer to the Keypad Display User Guide (P/N 387631).
communication with the main system panel.

System requirements
ABC DEF
HH:MM:SS MM/DD/YYYY
1 2 3 The KPDISP must be connected to a 3-SAC module. The
KPDISP communicates with the system control panel via the
GHI JKL MNO
SYSTEM BANNER LINE 1
SYSTEM BANNER LINE 2
4 5 6
0-9)Password:_______
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9 3-SAC. The 3-SAC supports the SAC bus (an RS-485 line)
#)Clear
which can be configured as Class A or Class B, depending on
? 0 #
application requirements.
In addition to security messaging, the SAC bus transmits
database updates and life safety event messages to the
KPDISP.
Description The KPDISP is shipped with a service password of 0000000 to
The Keypad Display (model KPDISP) is a control and display allow initial testing. When any password is downloaded to the
module used in security and life safety applications. After keypad, the service password is removed.
entering a password, the user can:
• Arm and disarm partitions
Specifications
• Review off-normal points Dimensions
• Bypass or include points Closed size: (W x H x D): 7.22 x 4.70 x 1.13 in (18.34 x
• Perform various life safety functions 11.94 x 2.86 cm)
Open height: 8.72 in (22.15 cm)
The KPDISP has a compact, covered enclosure which houses: Cover swing (from wall): 5.2 in (13.21 cm)
Cover removal clearance: ~1 in on right side
• An LCD display
Material: High impact polymer, white
• A telephone-style keypad
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
• A variable-tone sounder
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH, non-condensing
• An internal processor
Storage temperature range: –4 to 140 °F (–20 to 60 °C)
The module is compact enough to mount near exit doors or Compatible electrical boxes
behind counters. Mounting holes in the back cover fit standard North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box
electrical boxes. Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box
European 100 mm square box
Features Wire size: 14 to 22 AWG (1.50 to 0.25 sq mm)
A removable, hinged front cover protects the keys and Power: 18.4 to 26.4 Vdc
provides space for basic operating instructions. Grooves in the Current: 95 mA
cover transmit light from the illuminated keypad. Partitions: 255 maximum
Users: 200 maximum
The display is a backlit LCD which lights when in use. It can Languages: 2 (user-selectable)
display 8 lines of 21 characters. Each KPDISP supports two
user-selectable languages and can display text in most
languages.
The telephone-style keypad is continuously backlit. The keys You may find it easier to install the KPDISP if you remove the
are wear-resistant silicone rubber. They have a perceptible hinged cover. You’ll need the LRM removal tool (P/N 210415)
range of travel, and provide positive tactile and audible to remove the back plate, a small screwdriver to tighten the
feedback. terminal screws, and a standard screwdriver to mount the back
plate to the electrical box.
A variable-tone sounder is part of the KPDISP module. This
can be programmed to emit tones of a specific frequency and Note: Leave about 1 inch of clearance between the right side
duration, so as to provide audible feedback to the user. of the KPDISP and the door (or other obstructions) to insert the
LRM removal tool when removing the cover.

KPDISP - Keypad Display 1/2
To install the KPDISP:
1. Use the LRM removal tool to press the locking tab inward
(toward the wire hole) and remove the back.
2. Mount the back to the electrical box, pulling the wires
through the hole in the back.
3. Strip the wires to the correct length, approximately 1/4
inch (~6 mm).
4. Attach the power cable wires to the top terminal block.
Observe the correct polarity.
5. Attach the communication cable wires to the bottom
terminal block.
6. Insert the hinge tabs on the left side of the body into the
slots in the back, then press the right side of the body onto
the back to engage the locking tab. 2-gang box
7. Attach the front cover if you removed it for installation. Surface mounting,
4 in box, or 100 mm box
Locking tab
Rear view of the KPDISP, showing the locking tab and

mounting holes
Wiring diagram
Note: All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
IN OUT IN OUT
24 VDC
– +
24 Vdc – –
from last device or 24 Vdc
power supply + to next device
+
SAC bus – – SAC bus to next device,

from last device or or 120 ! EOL if Class B,
3-SAC module + + or 3-SAC if Class A
– +
SAC bus
IN OUT IN OUT
Front view of the backplate as mounted on the electrical box, showing terminal connections
2/2 18OCT01 P/N: 3100054 REV: 1.0

NETCOM-16D
Multiport Device Server

To install the NETCOM-16D, complete these steps in order.
1. Select a desktop location for the NETCOM-16D.
2. Connect one or more serial (RS-232) devices to the
RJ-45 ports. See "Wiring diagram."
test pwr lnk pol ok net rcv xmt

Note: To provide a proper interface for the
NETCOM-16D, EST2 and IRC-3 panels require an
IOP3-A and FCC panels require an FCOM-232 card.
3. Connect an Ethernet cable to the 10Base-T port on the
NETCOM-16D and then to your Ethernet network
connection. See "Wiring diagram."
The NETCOM-16D is a multiport device server that provides 4. Attach one end of the power cable to the NETCOM-16D
shared network access to terminals, devices, console ports, and plug the other end into a surge protected electrical
and printers for a variety of network protocols and operating outlet or UPS (recommended). See "Wiring diagram."
systems. The NETCOM-16D will network-enable up to 16
peripheral serial devices in one location. 5. Turn on the NETCOM-16D.
The NETCOM-16D goes through a set of power-up
Specifications diagnostics for 12 seconds. The LEDs show varying
Power requirements patterns corresponding to the tests being run.
Voltage: 95 to 250 Vac, 3-wire single phase, auto-ranging 6. Install the EZWebCon software on your PC.
Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
Operating current: 300 mA @ 120 V 7. Assign the NETCOM-16D an IP address using
Power consumption: 40 watts (maximum) EZWebCon. See "Assigning an IP address to the
Fuse rating: 1.6 A, 250 V NETCOM-16D." Also see the "System setup procedures
Supported serial protocols: RS-232, RS-423, RS-422 and worksheets" topic in the Network Applications
Operating environment Manual (P/N 3100576) for obtaining an IP address.
8. Configure the serial RS-232 ports using EZWebCon.
See "Configuring a NETCOM-16D RS-232 port."
LEDs and switches 9. Configure the communication ports on each control

panel and FireWorks computer to communicate with the
NETCOM-16D. See "Configuring a control panel or
LED Function FireWorks computer" for required configuration settings.
PWR Lights to indicate the unit has power 10. After all installation, wiring, and communication settings
are complete, test the communication of the
LNK Lights to indicate a functional 10Base-T network link NETCOM-16D with each component.
POL Lights to indicate a swapped 10Base-T cable
Wiring diagram
OK Blinks to indicate that the unit is functioning properly
The back panel of the NETCOM-16D has a power plug, RJ-45
NET Blinks to indicate Ethernet activity 10Base-T Ethernet port, and sixteen RJ-45 serial ports.
RCV Blinks periodically to indicate serial characters
entering the unit
RJ-45 serial RS-232 ports RJ-45 10Base-T Ethernet
XMT Blinks periodically to indicate serial characters network connection
exiting the unit 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Not used
Switch Function 1 2 3 4
Serial ports
5 6 7 8 10BASE-T
Test/ When pressed for 5 seconds during power up,

Reset flushes NVR (non volatile RAM) TUV
S E RV IC E geprufte
Sicherheit
EN60950
Power Turns the NETCOM-16D on and off

LIST ED LR89493
6J40
UL1950
Power plug connection [1]
[1] An AC surge protector (6 kV, 0.5 µsec rise time) is required
Installation Sheet 02APR03 P/N: 3100573 REV: 1.0

NETCOM-16D - Multiport Device Server 1/3
Pinouts DTE - DB-25 adapter pinout
RJ-45 Ethernet connector RJ-45 RJ-45 to DB-25
serial adapter
Cable RJ-45 DB-25
port
12345678 1 RX+ (server) (terminal)
2 RX- CTS
(in) 86 8 1 1 4 RTS
3 TX+
6 TX- DSR 7
(in) 5 7 2 2 20 DTR
RX+
(in) 64 6 3 3 2 TXD
RX- 53 5 4 4
TX- 42 4 5 5 7 SG
TX+ 6 3
(out) 3 3 6 RXD
RJ-45 serial connectors DTR
2 2 7 7 6 DSR
(out)
RS-232 limits: 15 m (50 ft) in length at 9600 K baud and RTS 1 1 8 8 5 CTS
2 m (6 ft) at 115.2 K baud (out)
12345678 1 RTS (out) If you are connecting an RJ-45 port to a DTE device (such as a
2 DTR (out) terminal) that has a DB-25 connector, you will need to use an
3 TX+ (out) RJ-45-DTE DB-25 adapter. To connect an RJ-45 port to a
4 TX-
5 RX- DB-25 connector on a DCE device, you will need an RJ-45 to
6 RX+ (in) DCE DB-25 adapter.
7 DSR (in)
8 CTS (in) RJ-45 to DB-9
RJ-45 RJ-45 to DB-9

serial adapter
Cable
RJ-45 Control panels port RJ-45 DB-9
(server) (terminal)
3-CPU1 2-MCM CM1N FCOM- IOP3-A
(TB2) (TB6) (TB1) 232 (TB2/3) CTS
(in) 86 8 1 1 7 RTS
(TB1)
DSR 7 7 2
(in) 5 2 4 DTR
3 (TX+) RXD RXD TB1-3 RXD TB2/3-4
(RXD) (RXD) RX+ TXD
(in) 64 6 3 3 3
6 (RX+) TXD TXD TB1-4 TXD TB2/3-3 RX- 53 5 4 4
(TXD) (TXD)
TX- 42 4 5 5 5 SG
4 (TX-) COM COM TB1-2 COM TB2/3-2
(COM) (COM) TX+ 3 3 6 6 2 RXD
(out)
5 (RX-) COM COM TB1-2 COM TB2/3-2 DTR 2 2 7 7 6 DSR
(COM) (COM) (out)
RTS 1 1 8 8 8 CTS
(out)
RJ-45 to DB-25
DCE - DB-25 adapter pinout Note: The arrows represent the direction of the signal. The
pinouts assume that the 8-conductor cable connecting the unit
RJ-45 RJ-45 to DB-25
and the adapter block is a swapped cable. Both the transmit
serial adapter
Cable RJ-45 DB-25 and receive ground signals on the unit connector are wired to
port
(server) (modem) the signal ground on a DB-9 adapter.
CTS
(in) 86 8 1 1 5 CTS
DSR
(in) 75 7 2 2 8 DCD
RX+
(in) 64 6 3 3 3 RXD
RX- 53 5 4 4
TX- 42 4 5 5 7 SG
TX+ 3 3 6 6 2 TXD
(out)
DTR 2 7 7 20 DTR
(out) 2
RTS 1 1 8 8 4
(out) RTS
P/N: 3100573 REV: 1.0 02APR03 Installation Sheet

2/3 NETCOM-16D - Multiport Device Server
Assigning an IP address to the 10. Click OK.
NETCOM-16D 11. Click Menu.
The EZWebCon configuration software is the easiest way to 12. Click Extract Configuration from Server.
configure the NETCOM-16D. Follow these steps to assign an
This allows you to save the NETCOM-16D configuration in
IP address to the NETCOM-16D.
a file. If there is a problem, you can download this file to
Note: For more details on using the EZWebCon software, refer the NETCOM-16D and avoid repeating the configuration
to its online help system. steps.
1. From the Action menu, click Assign IP Address. 13. Follow the instructions in the Save Configuration window.
2. Enter or change the IP-related settings: 14. Click OK.
a. For Ethernet Address, enter the number that appears 15. Click Close.
on the bottom label of your NETCOM-16D.
You have now finished setting up the NETCOM-16D.
b. For IP Address, enter the desired IP address for your
16. From the File menu, click Exit.
NETCOM-16D. [1]
c. For Subnet Mask, change the values provided only if Configuring a control panel or FireWorks
you wish to use a mask other than the default. [1]
computer
[1] Refer to the topic "System setup procedures and
worksheets" in the Network Applications Manual (P/N EST3 panel settings
3100576) for obtaining an IP address and subnet mask.
In the SDU, set the RS-232 communication port to
3. Click OK. "Gateway 3" for FireWorks communications.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions.
FireWorks settings
Configuring a NETCOM-16D RS-232 port The following settings must be configured in the FireWorks
Communications Manager for each NETCOM-16D serial port
You need to configure each serial port that is being connected that is connected to a control panel.
to a control panel.
• IP address: xx.xx.xx.xx
1. From the File menu, click Browse Network. • IP port number: 3001 to 3016
Your NETCOM-16D will be listed with its IP address. • Network type: any
• EST3 port type: Gateway 3
2. Click the NETCOM-16D in the list.
3. Click OK.
Your NETCOM-16D is displayed with its assigned IP
address.
4. Click the NETCOM-16D to highlight it.
5. From the Action menu, click Manage.
6. Click Maintenance.
7. Double-click Ports.
8. Select the port you want to edit. You must set up each port
that you are connecting a device to (e.g. a control panel).
9. On the General tab, set the Serial Port General
Parameters using the following:
CM1N, DCPU, and 2-MCM
Character size: 8
Parity: Even
Access: Remote
Flow control: None
Stop bits: 1
Speed: 1200 to 9600
3-CPU1
Character size: 8
Parity: None
Access: Remote
Flow control: None
Stop bits: 1
Speed: 19200

NETCOM-16D - Multiport Device Server 3/3
NETCOM-1F
Device Server
Introduction Step 7: Configure the communication ports on each

control panel, FireWorks, and ACDB computer to
This installation checklist is a supplement to the NETCOM-1F communicate with the NETCOM-1F. See pages 2
User Guide. Use this checklist to set up and install your and 3 of this installation sheet for configuration
NETCOM-1F. Make sure you follow the procedures in the settings. Refer to both the "Overview" and
order shown. "Application" settings.
Parts you will need: Note: If you are using the NETCOM-1F with an
ACDB computer or FireWorks computer with
• NETCOM-1F
CCTV controllers, you need to install the
• NETCOM-BRKT mounting bracket
NETDIRECT software and set it up to
• NETCOM-1F User Guide (P/N 900-290)
communicate on your network. Follow the
• Network Applications Manual (P/N 3100576)
procedures in Section 4, "NETDIRECT," in the
• NETCOM-CD
NETCOM-1F User Guide for installation and
setup information. Refer to both the "Overview"
Steps for setting up and installing a and "Application" settings on pages 2 and 3 of
NETCOM-1F this installation sheet for configuration settings.
Step 1: Review Section 1, "Introduction," in the Step 8: After all installation, wiring, and communication
NETCOM-1F User Guide. This will help you to settings are complete, test the communication of
become familiar with the NETCOM-1F's each NETCOM-1F with each component they are
specifications, LEDs, RJ-45 connection, and fiber connected to.
optic connections.
Step 2: Follow the procedures in Section 2, "Getting
Started," in the NETCOM-1F User Guide for 24 Vdc from
connecting the NETCOM-1F to a computer control panel [1]
and/or Ethernet network and for assigning an IP
address to the NETCOM-1F. Also refer to the
topic "System setup procedures and worksheets"
in the Network Applications Manual 10Base-FL (fiber optic)
(P/N 3100576) for obtaining IP addresses. Ethernet network connection
(receive) [4]
Step 3: Follow the procedures in Section 3, "Configuring RJ-45 Ethernet 10Base-T
the Unit," in the NETCOM-1F User Guide for 10Base-FL (fiber optic)
network connection [4] Ethernet network connection
configuring the NETCOM-1F to communicate on (transmit) [4]
a network.
Note: See pages 2 and 3 of this installation sheet
for device configuration settings. Refer to both
the "Overview" and "Application" settings.
Step 4: Disconnect the NETCOM-1F from your PC or
network.
DB-9 and DB-25 serial port (RS-232)
Step 5: Install the NETCOM-1F in a cabinet using the
from control panel [2] [3]
NETCOM-BRKT mounting bracket. See
installation sheet P/N 3100575.
Figure 1: Wiring connections
Step 6: Connect all wiring. See Figure 1.
Notes
- Connect the 24 Vdc power wiring
- Connect the RJ-45 or fiber optic network wiring [1] Remove the transformer from the supplied power cable
- Connect the DB-25 RS-232 wiring and connect the wires to a 24 Vdc power source on the
control panel.
Note: To provide a proper interface for the device
server, EST2 and IRC-3 panels require an • Solid black wire = positive (+)
IOP3-A and FCC panels require an FCOM-232 • White striped wire = negative (-)
card.
[2] Pinout requirements can be found in the NETCOM-1F
Caution: When using a NETCOM-1F between a User Guide in Section 1, "Introduction" and in the table
FireWorks computer and CCTV controllers, if below.
either of the two transmit or receive wires are [3] The NETCOM-1F can be configured to operate on CH1 or
shorted, you will lose communications. To CH2.
reestablish communications, shut down and
restart FireWorks. [4] Either the Ethernet connection or the fiber optic
connection can be used, but not both simultaneously.

NETCOM-1F - Device Server 1/3
• Remote port: set to 0 for most panels and applications; set
DB-9 Control panels
to 10001 (CH1) or 10002 (CH2) for device servers
and
3-CPU1 2-MCM CM1N FCOM- IOP3-A connected to a control panel in a data terminal application
DB-25
(TB2) (TB6) (TB1) 232 (TB1) (TB2/3) • DisConnMode: set to 00
• FlushMode: set to 80 if the device server is connected to
Pin 2 RXD RXD TB1-3 RXD TB2/3-4 an EST3 panel and 00 for all others
(TXD) (RXD) (RXD) • PackControl: set to 23 (on only if Flush Mode is enabled)
• DisConnTime: set to 00:00
Pin 3 TXD TXD TB1-4 TXD TB2/3-3 • SendChar1: set to 0D if device server is connected to an
(RXD) (TXD) (TXD) EST3 panel; 00 for all others
DB-9: COM COM TB1-2 COM TB2/3-2 • SendChar2: set to 0D if device server is connected to an
Pin 5 (COM) (COM) EST3 panel; 00 for all others
(COM)
DB-25: Application specific configuration settings
Pin 7
(COM) The following settings are application specific and should be
used for each of the listed applications. See the Network
Applications Manual (P/N 3100576).
Overview of configuration settings
Fireworks with EST3 using a NETCOM-1F
NETCOM-1F configuration settings are dependent on two
factors, the panel you are connecting to and the application • Panel RS-232 port configured as Gateway 3 (this is set in
you are setting up. the SDU)
• FireWorks Communications Manager = TCP/IP port:
EST3 panel settings
- IP address: xx.xx.xx.xx
• RS-232 port: set to "Gateway 3" for FireWorks - IP port number: 10001 or 10002 (CH1 or CH2)
• RS-232 port: set to "none" for the ACDB - Network type: any
• RS-232 port: set to "printer" for a data terminal - EST3 port type: Gateway 3
FireWorks settings (Communications Manager) • Device server settings:
• IP address: set to address of device server - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel (that was set in the
• IP port number: set to 10001 or 10002 for CH1 or CH2 SDU, either 19.2 K or 9600)
• EST3 port type: set to Gateway 3 for TCP/IP - I/F mode: 4C
communications - Flow: 00
- Port number: 10001 (CH1) or 10002 (CH2)
ACDB settings
- Connect mode: C0
• Outbound port: set to virtual port (configured in - Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00
NETDIRECT) - Remote port: 0
- DisConnMode: 00
NETDIRECT settings - FlushMode: 80
If you are using the NETCOM-1F with an ACDB computer or - Pack control: 23
FireWorks computer with CCTV controllers, you need to install - DisConnTime: 00:00
the NETDIRECT software and set it up to communicate with - SendChar1: 0d
your network. Follow the procedures in Section 4, - SendChar2: 0d
"NETDIRECT," in the NETCOM-1F User Guide for installation Fireworks with EST2, IRC-3, or FCC using a NETCOM-1F
and setup information.
• FireWorks Communications Manager – TCP/IP port:
• Create a virtual COM port (one that does not physically
exist) - IP address: xx.xx.xx.xx
• Add the IP address TCPPort = 3001 - IP port number: 10001 or 10002 (CH1 or CH2)
- Network type: any
Device server settings - EST3 port type: N/A
• Baud rate: set to baud rate of the panel • Device server settings:
• I/F Mode: set to 4C for EST3, 7C for IRC-3, EST2, FCC,
and Pelco (CCTV) - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel (usually 2400 to 9600)
• Flow: set to 00 - I/F mode: 7C
• Port number: set to 10001; if using NETDIRECT add - Flow: 00
11000 to the TCPPort value that was entered in - Port number: 10001 (CH1) or 10002 (CH2)
NETDIRECT (e.g. 11000 + 3001 = 14001) (acceptable - Connect mode: C0
range = 14001 to 14009) - Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00
• Connect mode: set to C0 for most panels and applications, - Remote port: 0
set to C1 for device servers connected to a control panel - DisConnMode: 00
in the data terminal application - FlushMode: 00
• Remote IP: set to 0.0.0.0; if connecting to another device - DisConnTime: 00:00
server (e.g. data terminal application) set to the IP address - SendChar1: 00
of the device server connected to the data terminal - SendChar2: 00

2/3 NETCOM-1F - Device Server
ACDB with EST3 using a NETCOM-1F Data terminal device server connecting to an EST3 device
server (such as the printer and 3-VDUT applications)
• EST3 port set to none (set in the SDU)
• NETDIRECT: • Device server connected to a panel:
Install the NETDIRECT software on the ACDB computer - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel (set in the SDU)
and set it up to communicate with your network. Follow the - I/F mode: 4C
procedures in Section 4, "NETDIRECT," in the NETCOM- - Flow: 00
1F User Guide for installation and setup information. - Port number: 10001
- Connect mode: C1
- Create a virtual COM port (one that does not physically - Remote IP address: IP address of the device server
exist) with NETDIRECT connected to the DTE device
- Set the IP address to that of the device server xx.xx.xx.xx - Remote port: 10001 (CH1) or 10002 (CH2)
- Set the TCPPort to 3001 (acceptable range: 3001 to 3009) - DisConnMode: 00
• ACDB settings: - FlushMode: 80
- Pack control: 23
- Set the outbound port to the port you configured in - DisConnTime: 00:00
NETDIRECT - SendChar1: 0d
• Device server settings: - SendChar2: 0d
- Baud rate: 9600 • Device server connected to the DTE device:

- I/F mode: 4C - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel (set in the SDU)
- Flow: 00 - I/F mode: 4C
- Port number: 11000 + TCPPort value set in NETDIRECT - Flow: 00
(acceptable range: 14001 to 14009) - Port number: 10001 (CH1) or 10002 (CH2)
- Connect mode: C0 - Connect mode: C0
- Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00 - Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00
- Remote port: 0 - Remote port: 00
- DisConnMode: 00 - DisConnMode: 00
- FlushMode: 00 - FlushMode: 00
- DisConnTime: 00:00 - DisConnTime: 00:00
- SendChar1: 00 - SendChar1: 00
Fireworks with CCTV (TCP/IP) using a NETCOM-1F Data terminal device server connecting to an EST2, IRC-3,
• FireWorks Communications manager = serial port: or FCC device server (such as the printer and VDU-3
applications)
- COM port set to virtual COM port in NETDIRECT
- Baud rate: 9600 • Device server connected to the panel:
- Parity: even - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel
- Stop Bits: 1 - I/F mode: 7C
- EST3 port type: N/A - Flow: 00
• NETDIRECT settings: - Port number: 10001
- Connect mode: C1
Install the NETDIRECT software on the ACDB computer - Remote IP address: IP address of the device server
and set it up to communicate with your network. Follow the - Remote port: 10001 (CH1) or 10002 (CH2)
procedures in Section 4, "NETDIRECT," in the NETCOM- - DisConnMode: 00
1F User Guide for installation and setup information. - FlushMode: 00
- DisConnTime: 00:00
- Create a virtual COM port (one that does not physically
- SendChar1: 00
exist)
- SendChar2: 00
- Set the IP address to the device server xx.xx.xx.xx
- Set the TCPPort to 3001 (acceptable range: 3001 to 3009) • Device Server connected to the DTE device:
• Device server settings: - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel
- I/F mode: 7C
- Baud rate: 9600
- Flow: 00
- I/F mode: 7C
- Port number: 10001 (CH1) or 10002 (CH2)
- Flow: 00
- Connect mode: C1
- Port number: 11000 + TCPPort value set in NETDIRECT
- Remote IP address: IP address of the device server
(acceptable range: 14001 to 14009)
connected to the panel
- Connect mode: C0
- Remote port: 00
- Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00
- DisConnMode: 00
- Remote Port: 00
- FlushMode: 00
- DisConMode: 00
- Flush mode: 00
- SendChar1: 00
- SendChar2: 00
- Send char: 00
- Send char: 00

NETCOM-1F - Device Server 3/3
NETCOM-1S
Device Server
Introduction Step 7: Configure the communication port(s) on each

This installation checklist is a supplement to the NETCOM-1S control panel, FireWorks, and ACDB computer to
User Guide. Use this checklist to set up and install your communicate with the NETCOM-1S. See pages
NETCOM-1S. Make sure you follow the procedures in the 2 and 3 of this installation sheet for configuration
order shown. settings. Refer to both the "Overview" and
"Application" settings.
Parts you will need:
Note: If you are using the NETCOM-1S with an
• NETCOM-1S ACDB computer or FireWorks computer with
• NETCOM-BRKT mounting bracket CCTV controllers, you need to install the
• NETCOM-1S User Guide (P/N 900-291) NETDIRECT software and set it up to
• Network Applications Manual (P/N 3100576) communicate on your network. Follow the
• NETCOM-CD procedures in Section 4, "NETDIRECT," in the
NETCOM-1S User Guide for installation and
Setting up and installing a NETCOM-1S setup information. Refer to both the "Overview"
and "Application" settings on pages 2 and 3 of
Step 1: Review Section 1, "Introduction," in the this installation sheet for configuration settings.
NETCOM-1S User Guide. This will help you to
become familiar with the NETCOM-1S's Step 8: After all installation, wiring, and communication
specifications, LEDs, DB-25 connection, and settings are complete, test the communication of
RJ-45 connection. each NETCOM-1S with each component they are
connected to.
Step 2: Follow the procedures in Section 2, "Getting
Started," in the NETCOM-1S User Guide for
connecting the NETCOM-1S to a computer and/or
Ethernet network and for assigning an IP address
to the NETCOM-1S. Also refer to the topic
"System setup procedures and worksheets" in the
Network Applications Manual (P/N 3100576) for
obtaining IP addresses.
Step 3: Follow the procedures in Section 3, "Configuring
the Unit," in the NETCOM-1S User Guide for
24 Vdc from
configuring the NETCOM-1S to communicate on
control panel [1] DB-25 serial
a network.
RJ-45 Ethernet 10/100Base-T port (RS-232)
Note: See pages 2 and 3 of this installation sheet network connection from control panel [2]
for device configuration settings. Refer to both
the "Overview" and "Application" settings. Figure 1: Wiring connections
Step 4: Disconnect the NETCOM-1S from your PC or Notes
network.
[1] Remove the transformer from the supplied power cable
Step 5: Install the NETCOM-1S in a cabinet using the and connect the wires to a 24 Vdc power source on the
NETCOM-BRKT mounting bracket. See control panel. Polarity:
installation sheet P/N 3100575.
• Solid black wire = positive (+)
Step 6: Connect all wiring. See Figure 1. • White striped wire = negative (-)
- Connect the 24 Vdc power wiring [2] Pinout requirements can be found in the NETCOM-1S
- Connect the RJ-45 network wiring User Guide in Section 1, "Introduction" and in the table
- Connect the DB-25 RS-232 wiring below.
Note: To provide a proper interface for the device
server, EST2 and IRC-3 panels require an IOP3-A DB-25 Control panels
and FCC panels require an FCOM-232 card.
3-CPU1 2-MCM CM1N FCOM- IOP3-A
Caution: When using a NETCOM-1S between a (TB2) (TB6) (TB1) 232 (TB1) (TB2/3)
FireWorks computer and CCTV controllers, if
either of the two transmit or receive wires are Pin 2 RXD RXD TB1-3 RXD TB2/3-4
shorted, you will lose communications. To (TXD) (RXD) (RXD)
reestablish communications, shut down and
Pin 3 TXD TXD TB1-4 TXD TB2/3-3
restart FireWorks.
(RXD) (TXD) (TXD)
Pin 7 COM COM TB1-2 COM TB2/3-2
(COM) (COM) (COM)

NETCOM-1S - Device Server 1/3
Overview of configuration settings Application specific configuration settings
NETCOM-1S configuration settings are dependent on two The following settings are application specific and should be
factors, the panel you are connecting to and the application used for each of the listed applications. See the Network
you are setting up. Applications Manual (P/N 3100576).
EST3 panel settings Fireworks with EST3 using a NETCOM-1S

• RS-232 port: set to "Gateway 3" for FireWorks • Panel RS-232 port configured as Gateway 3 (this is set in
• RS-232 port: set to "none" for the ACDB the SDU)
• RS-232 port: set to "printer" for a data terminal • FireWorks Communications Manager = TCP/IP port:
- IP address: xx.xx.xx.xx
FireWorks settings (Communications Manager) - IP port number: 10001
• IP address: set to address of device server - Network type: any
• IP port number: set to 10001 - EST3 port type: Gateway 3
• EST3 port type: set to Gateway 3 for TCP/IP • Device server settings:
communications
- Baud rate: baud rate of the panel (that was set in the
ACDB settings SDU, either 19.2 K or 9600)
- I/F mode: 4C
• Outbound port: set to virtual port (configured in - Flow: 00
NETDIRECT) - Port number: 10001
- Connect mode: C0
NETDIRECT settings - Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00
- Remote port: 0
If you are using the NETCOM-1S with an ACDB computer or
- DisConnMode: 00
FireWorks computer with CCTV controllers, you need to install
- FlushMode: 80
the NETDIRECT software and set it up to communicate with
- Pack control: 23
your network. Follow the procedures in Section 4,
"NETDIRECT," in the NETCOM-1S User Guide for installation
- SendChar1: 0d
and setup information.
- SendChar2: 0d
• Create a virtual COM port (one that does not physically
exist) Fireworks with EST2, IRC-3, or FCC using a NETCOM-1S
• Add the IP address TCPPort = 3001
• FireWorks Communications manager = TCP/IP port:
Device server settings - IP address: xx.xx.xx.xx
- IP port number: 10001
• Baud rate: set to baud rate of the panel
- Network type: any
• I/F Mode: set to 4C for EST3, 7C for IRC-3, EST2, FCC,
- EST3 port type: N/A
and Pelco (CCTV)
• Flow: set to 00 • Device server settings:
• Port number: set to 10001; if using NETDIRECT add
11000 to the TCPPort value that was entered in - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel (usually 2400 to 9600)
NETDIRECT (11000 + 3001 = 14001) (acceptable range = - I/F mode: 7C
14001 to 14009) - Flow: 00
• Connect mode: set to C0 for most panels and applications, - Port number: 10001
set to C1 for device servers connected to a control panel - Connect mode: C0
in a data terminal application - Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00
• Remote IP: set to 0.0.0.0; if connecting to another device - Remote port: 0
server (e.g. data terminal application) set to the IP address - DisConnMode: 00
of the device server connected to the data terminal - FlushMode: 00
• Remote port: set to 0 for most panels and applications; set - DisConnTime: 00:00
to 10001 for device servers connected to the control panel - SendChar1: 00
in a data terminal application - SendChar2: 00
• DisConnMode: set to 00
• FlushMode: set to 80 if the device server is connected to
an EST3 panel and 00 for all others
• PackControl: set to 23 (on only if Flush Mode is enabled)
• DisConnTime: set to 00:00
• SendChar1: set to 0D if device server is connected to an
EST3 panel, 00 for all others
• SendChar2: set to 0D if device server is connected to an
EST3 panel, 00 for all others

2/3 NETCOM-1S - Device Server
ACDB with EST3 using a NETCOM-1S Data terminal device server connecting to an EST3 device
server (such as the printer and 3-VDUT applications)
• EST3 port set to none (set in the SDU)
• NETDIRECT settings: • Device server connected to a panel:
Install the NETDIRECT software on the ACDB computer - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel (set in the SDU)
and set it up to communicate with your network. Follow the - I/F mode: 4C
procedures in Section 4, "NETDIRECT," in the NETCOM- - Flow: 00
1S User Guide for installation and setup information. - Port number: 10001
- Connect mode: C1
- Create a virtual COM port (one that does not physically - Remote IP address: IP address of the device server
exist) with NETDIRECT connected to the DTE device
- Set the IP address to that of the device server xx.xx.xx.xx - Remote port: 10001
- Set the TCPPort to 3001 (acceptable range: 3001 to 3009) - DisConnMode: 00
• ACDB settings: - FlushMode: 80
- Pack control: 23
- Set the outbound port to the port you configured in - DisConnTime: 00:00
NETDIRECT - SendChar1: 0d
• Device server settings: - SendChar2: 0d
- Baud rate: 9600 • Device server connected to the DTE device:

- I/F mode: 4C - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel (set in the SDU)
- Flow: 00 - I/F mode: 4C
- Port number: 11000 + TCPPort value set in NETDIRECT - Flow: 00
(acceptable range: 14001 to 14009) - Port number: 10001
- Connect mode: C0 - Connect mode: C0
- Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00 - Remote IP address: 00.00.00.00
- Remote port: 0 - Remote port: 00
- DisConnMode: 00 - DisConnMode: 00
- FlushMode: 00 - FlushMode: 00
- DisConnTime: 00:00 - DisConnTime: 00:00
Fireworks with CCTV (TCP/IP) using a NETCOM-1S Data terminal device server connecting to an EST2, IRC-3,
• FireWorks Communications Manager = serial port: or FCC device server (such as the printer and VDU-3
applications)
- COM port set to virtual COM port in NETDIRECT
- Baud rate: 9600 • Device server connected to the panel:
- Parity: even - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel
- Stop Bits: 1 - I/F mode: 7C
- EST3 port type: N/A - Flow: 00
• NETDIRECT settings: - Port number: 10001
- Connect mode: C1
Install the NETDIRECT software on the FireWorks - Remote IP address: IP address of the device server
computer and set it up to communicate with your CCTV connected to the DTE device
controller. Follow the procedures in Section 4, - Remote port: 10001
"NETDIRECT," in the NETCOM-1S User Guide for - DisConnMode: 00
installation and setup information. - FlushMode: 00
- Create a virtual COM port (one that does not physically
- SendChar1: 00
exist)
- SendChar2: 00
- Set the IP address to the device server xx.xx.xx.xx
- Set the TCPPort to 3001 (acceptable range: 3001 to 3009) • Device server connected to the DTE device:
• Device server settings: - Baud rate: baud rate of the panel
- I/F mode: 7C
- Baud rate: 9600
- Flow: 00
- I/F mode: 7C
- Port number: 10001
- Flow: 00
- Connect mode: C0
- Port number: 11000 + TCPPort value set in NETDIRECT
(acceptable range: 14001 to 14009)
- Remote port: 00
- Connect mode: C0
- DisConnMode: 00
- FlushMode: 00
- Remote Port: 00
- DisConMode: 00
- SendChar1: 00
- Flush mode: 00
- SendChar2: 00
- Send char: 00
- Send char: 00

NETCOM-1S - Device Server 3/3
NETCOM-BRKT
Mounting Bracket
Product description Mounting a NETCOM-1S on the NETCOM-BRKT
The NETCOM-BRKT is a metal bracket that is installed in a Mount up to two NETCOM-1S modules on the bracket using
3-CHAS7 or MFC-A cabinet and is used for mounting a the diagram below.
NETCOM-1S or NETCOM-1F device server or a NETSW hub.
Holes for top device
You must first install the NETCOM-BRKT to either a 3-CHAS7 NETCOM-BRKT
or an MFC-A cabinet before connecting a device to the
bracket. Use the instructions below to install the bracket and NETCOM-1S
connect the device servers.
Mounting the NETCOM-BRKT in a 3-CHAS7
Mount each bracket using the diagram below. Note: Different
mounting holes are used to attach the bracket to the left and
right positions on the 3-CHAS7.
6-32, 1/4-inch Holes for bottom device
pan head screws
3-CHAS7 Mounting a NETCOM-1F on the NETCOM-BRKT

Mount the NETCOM-1F on the bracket using the diagram
below.
NETCOM-BRKTs
NETCOM-BRKT
NETCOM-1F
6-32, 5/16-inch
countersunk screws
6-32, 1/4-inch
pan head screws
Mounting the NETCOM-BRKT in an MFC-A cabinet
Mount the bracket using the diagram below.
Mounting a NETSW on the NETCOM-BRKT
MFC-A cabinet Mount a NETSW on the bracket using the diagram below.
NETCOM-BRKT
6-32, 1/4-inch
NETCOM-BRKT pan head screws
NETSW
6-32, 1/4-inch
countersunk screws
Installation Sheet 20MAR03 P/N: 3100575 REV: 1.0

NETCOM-BRKT - Mounting Bracket 1/1
NETSW-EIS6-MM and NETSW-EIS6-SM
Switching Hub
Product description
This installation checklist is a supplement to the NETSW-EIS
Series Technical Reference Manual. Use this checklist to set
up and install your switch. Make sure you follow the
procedures in the order shown.
Parts you will need:
• NETSW-EIS6-MM or NETSW-EIS6-SM RJ-45 Ethernet network connections
• NETCOM-BRKT mounting bracket (to computers and device servers)
• NETSW-EIS Series Technical Reference Manual
(P/N 3100620)
Fiber optic RX
• Network Applications Manual (P/N 3100576) 5
• NETCOM-CD Fiber optic TX Network backbone
Fiber optic RX connections
Steps for setting up and installing an 6
Fiber optic TX
NETSW
10 Vdc 36
Step 1: Review the NETSW-EIS Series Technical 8 Vac 24 Power connection

Reference Manual for installation information,
wiring diagrams, specifications, LEDs, fiber cable
connections, and RJ-45 connections. Also see
the diagram on this sheet.
Step 2: Install the unit in a cabinet using the NETCOM-
Figure 1: NETSW wiring connections (also refer to the
BRKT mounting bracket. See installation sheet
NETSW-EIS Series Technical Reference Manual for more
P/N 3100575.
details)
Step 3: Connect the fiber optic network cables to the
switch using the procedures described in the
NETSW-EIS Series Technical Reference Manual
and the diagram on this sheet.
Step 4: Using CAT5 cable, connect the device servers,
FireWorks, or ACDB computers to the RJ-45
connections on the switch. Refer to the NETSW-
EIS Series Technical Reference Manual and the
diagram on this sheet.
Note: Do not connect the NETCOM-1F fiber
ports to the NETSW fiber ports.
Step 5: Connect the power wiring to the switch using the
procedures described in the NETSW-EIS Series
Technical Reference Manual and the diagram on
this sheet.
Step 6: Turn on the computers. When the computers
come online, they will configure themselves
accordingly. Refer to the topic "System setup
procedures and worksheets" in the Network
Applications Manual, for details on getting the IP
addresses and subnet mask of your new
network.
Step 7: Configure all device servers (NETCOM-1S or
NETCOM-1F). Refer to installation sheet P/N
3100571 and 3100572 for detailed instructions.
Installation Sheet 17MAR03 P/N: 3100574 REV: 1.0

NETSW-EIS6-MM and NETSW-EIS6-SM - Switching Hub 1/1
Power Supplies
Product description secured to the assembly using snap rivet fasteners. The
monitor module has a hinged front panel for mounting displays
or a blank protective faceplate.
3-BPS/M(-230) Booster Power Supply and 3-BBC/M(-230)
Booster/Charger Supply
TB1
The 3-BPS/M(-230) and 3-BBC/M(-230) booster power

supplies are used to provide additional power over and above
that of the 3-PPS/M(-230). Each model is composed of a heat
sink assembly and a monitor module. The monitor module
plugs into the rail and the heat sink assembly mounts onto the
rail chassis.
Depending on the size of the cabinet, up to three booster
power supplies can be added to make a total of 28 amps
P3
available for both internal and external applications. Each
booster supply provides filtered, regulated power to the rail
AUX ILI ARY P OW ER
1 2
TB1
P2
TB2
+BATTERY-TEMP
MON
chassis modules as well as 24 Vdc for operating ancillary
equipment.
Heat sink Monitor
assembly module A 3-BPS/M(-230) supply can share a common set of standby
batteries with the 3-PPS/M(-230) or 3-BBC/M(-230). Each 3-
BPS/M(-230) supervises its own battery connection but does
This installation sheet applies to the following models: not have any battery charging capability. The 3-BBC/M(-230) is
• 3-PPS/M(-230) Primary Power Supply capable of charging standby batteries.
• 3-BPS/M(-230) Booster Power Supply Each booster supply shares the panel's 24 Vdc electrical load
• 3-BBC/M(-230) Booster/Charger Supply with the 3-PPS/M(-230). In the event of a booster power supply
3-PPS/M(-230) Primary Power Supply failure, a trouble is annunciated, and the panel load is
distributed among the remaining operational power sources.
The 3-PPS/M(-230) Primary Power Supply provides the Should the load ever exceed the ability of the operable power
required power and related supervision functions for the control sources to supply the power, as in the event of an alarm, the
panel. The 3-PPS/M(-230) comprises a heat sink assembly system automatically switches to standby batteries.
and a monitor module. The monitor module plugs into the rail,
and the heat sink and the heat sink assembly mounts onto the The booster supply monitor module provides the interface
rail chassis. between the booster power supply and the panel, making the
required data and power connections to and from the rail
The 3-PPS/M(-230) provides filtered, regulated power to the chassis. The monitor module requires one rail space and is
rail chassis modules as well as 24 Vdc for operating ancillary secured to the assembly using snap rivet fasteners. The
equipment. AC power and battery connections are made to monitor module has a hinged front panel for mounting displays
fixed terminals on the heat sink assembly, away from the or a blank protective faceplate.
panel's power limited wiring.
The 3-PPS/M(-230) provides a dual rate constant current Specifications
battery charger circuit with automatic temperature
compensation. To prevent memory problems and total battery 3-PPS/M(-230), 3-BPS/M(-230), and 3-BBC/M(-230)
discharge, a battery monitor circuit supervises the standby Installation
batteries and disconnects them when they reach the low Heat sink assembly: Mounts onto the rail chassis
battery threshold. Monitor module: Mounts in one rail space
The 3-PPS/M(-230) checks the AC input source and Power input: 120 Vac, +10%, -15%, 3.0 A, 50 – 60 Hz
automatically switches to battery power in the event of a 230 Vac, +10%, -15%, 1.5 A, 50 – 60 Hz (-230
brownout or loss of AC power. In the event of a failure of one only)
or more booster power supplies, the 3-PPS/M(-230)
determines its ability, along with the surviving booster supplies, Brownout level: 102 Vac
to supply the load. If the load exceeds the ability of the primary 195 Vac (-230 only)
and surviving booster supplies to meet the demand, the 3-
Outputs
PPS/M(-230) automatically switches in the standby batteries.
Total: 24 Vdc at 7.0 A (internal and auxiliary outputs)
The 3-PPS/M(-230) also switches in the standby batteries if an
Internal DC: 24 Vdc at 7.0 A, max.
overload causes the heat sink temperature to reach a high
Auxiliary DC: Two 24 Vdc at 3.5 A max. Power-limited and
level.
supervised for ground faults and shorts.
The power supply monitor module provides the interface
Termination
between the 3-PPS/M(-230) and the panel, making the
AC Input: Terminals on heat sink assembly
required data and power connections to and from the rail
Batteries: Terminals on heat sink assembly
chassis. The monitor module requires one rail space and is

Power Supplies 1/4
Internal DC output: LRM chassis rails via monitor module
Auxiliary DC output: Removable plug-in terminal strips on Right mounting area for installing
monitor module booster power supply
6-32 x 3/4 threaded standoff
Current requirements (2 places)
3-PPS/M(-230): Included with CPU current requirements
3-BPS/M(-230): Alarm: 50 mA
Standby: 50 mA
3-BBC/M(-230): Alarm: 70 mA J9
Standby: 70 mA
J8
J11
J10
Temperature: 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C)
Humidity: 0 to 93% RH noncondensing at 32 C
3-PPS/M(-230) and 3-BBC/M(-230)
Battery charging
Capacity: 10 to 65 Ah
P2
Type: Temperature compensated dual rate (1.5 amps and
3.0 amps)
Supervision
Low AC #8-32 lock nut
Low battery: < 22.5 Vdc 6-32 x 1/2 pan head screw (4 places)
#6 lock washer
High battery #6 flat washer
Discharged battery: < 18 Vdc (2 places)
Ground fault: < 10 k
3-BPS/M(-230) only Figure 1: Heat sink assembly installation
Supervision Installing a monitor module
Low AC
Low Battery: < 22.5 Vdc Caution: This product contains components that are sensitive
Ground Fault: < 10 k to static electricity. Failure to follow proper handling procedures
will result in equipment damage.
Installation instructions To install a monitor module:
Installing a heat sink assembly 1. Plug the cable harness and ribbon cable into the monitor
module as shown in Figure 2. Ensure the cable
Heat sink assemblies are installed on the rail chassis behind
connections are secure.
the rail module connectors. Refer to Figure 1.
2. For a power supply monitor module, align the module to
To install a heat sink assembly:
the guide posts on slot 3 of the rail chassis.
1. Attach the heat sink assembly to the four threaded For a booster supply monitor module, align the module to
mounting studs on the rail chassis using lock nuts the guide posts on slot 3 or slot 5 of the rail chassis,
provided in the hardware kit. whichever is closest to the heat sink assembly.
2. Secure the bottom edge of the heat sink assembly to the 3. Route the cable harness over and behind the bottom rail
threaded standoffs on the rail chassis using screws and connect it to P2 on the heat sink assembly. Push in
provided in the hardware kit. until the connector clicks.
3. Secure the top edge of the heat sink assembly to the rail 4. Route the ribbon cable under the bottom rail and connect
chassis using the two threaded standoffs provided in the it to P3 on the heat sink assembly.
hardware kit.
5. Plug the module into the rail connectors and lock it into
4. Attach the AC terminal block cover to the threaded place using the snap rivet fasteners.
standoffs using two 6-32 x 1/2 pan head screws.
Notes
• Always mount the heat sink assembly for the primary
power supply onto the left mounting space of the rail
chassis in which the central processor module is installed
• Booster supplies, if installed, can be mounted on any rail
chassis, but no more than three booster supplies may be
installed in the same enclosure

2/4 Power Supplies
WARNING: High voltage levels capable of causing injury or
death may be present. Precautionary measures must be taken
to ensure that the mains power is de-energized and prevented
from being inadvertently switched on.
To connect the mains power wiring:
1. Ensure that the mains AC circuit is de-energized.

P6 2. Connect the mains AC conductors from the dedicated
mains distribution circuit to TB1 on the power supplies
(see Figure 4).
J4 3. Secure the power supply cover to the standoffs on the top
P3
P2 edge of each power supply.
Cable harness
(P/N 250187)
TB1
Ribbon cable
P/N 250189 (primary monitor module)
P/N 250188 (booster monitor module)
Figure 2: Power supply to monitor module cable connections

Dedicated 120 V or 230 V mains
Figure 3 shows a primary power supply and booster power power distribution circuit
supply installed in a chassis before they are wired.
TB1 TB1
J9
J8
J11
J10
G N H 120 VAC G N H 120 VAC

G L2 L1 230 VAC G L2 L1 230 VAC
Primary power supply Last booster supply

in the same cabinet
P3 P3
TB2
Figure 4: Mains power wiring
TEMP
MON
Auxiliary 24 Vdc riser wiring

Connect the 24 Vdc auxiliary power riser conductors to TB1 on
the power supply monitor module as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 3: Primary and booster power supplies installed in a
chassis Note: Current loads must be evenly distributed across all
power supplies.
Wiring instructions
All wiring must be made in accordance with the national
electrical code and all other local requirements.
Mains power wiring
Connect the mains power wiring after all power supplies have
been installed. No more than one primary power supply and
three booster supplies may be connected to a single mains AC
circuit. All mains power wiring must be double insulated.

Power Supplies 3/4
TB1
AUXILIARY POWER
1 2
TB2
AUXILIARY POWER
1 2 BATTERY TEMP
MON
TB1 TB2
24 Vdc
0 Vdc Not used
24 Vdc
0 Vdc
To plus and minus terminals
on cabinet battery or to plus and
Figure 5: 24 Vdc riser wire connections minus terminals on power
distribution bus in remote cabinet
Standby battery wiring
Connect the standby batteries to TB2 on the heat sink
Figure 6: Standby battery wire connections
assembly as shown in Figure 6 and according to the following
requirements: Table 1 lists typical battery and power supply combinations.
• Each set (pair) of batteries must be connected to a
separate battery charging circuit, either on a 3-PPS/M(- Table 1: Typical battery and power supply combinations
230) or on a 3-BBC/M(-230).
Total Power supplies Battery sets
• Each power supply must be connected to only one set of current required required
batteries. A 3-PPS/M(-230) and a 3-BPS/M(-230) can be
wired to the same set of batteries, as well as a 3-BBC/M(- 7A 1 (3-PPS/M(-230)) 1 set, 65 Ah max.
230) and a 3-BPS/M(-230), but never a 3-PPS/M(-230) 1 (3-PPS/M(-230))
and a 3-BBC/M(-230). 1 set, 65 Ah max.
1 (3-BPS/M(-230))
14 A
• Each power supply must have its own separate pair of 1 (3-PPS/M(-230))
wires connecting it to a set of standby batteries. Daisy 2 sets, 65 Ah max
1 (3-BBC/M(-230))
chaining battery connections from power supply to power
supply is not allowed. 1 (3-PPS/M(-230))
1 set, 65 Ah max.
2 (3-BPS/M(-230))
• All battery wiring must be the same length and wire gauge 21 A
1 (3-PPS/M(-230))
• All batteries connected to the same control panel must 3 sets, 65 Ah max
2 (3-BBC/M(-230))
have the same ampere-hour rating, be from the same
manufacturer, and have the same manufacturing date 1 (3-PPS/M(-230))
code 1 set, 65 Ah max.
3 (3-BPS/M(-230))
28 A
• Batteries greater than 17 Ah and any additional batteries 1 (3-PPS/M(-230))
must be installed in an external battery cabinet 4 sets, 65 Ah max
3 (3-BBC/M(-230))
• If an external battery cabinet is used to house standby
batteries, the cabinet must be installed within three feet
and in the same room as the control panel.

4/4 Power Supplies
Power Supplies
Product description chassis. The monitor module requires one rail space and is
secured to the assembly using snap rivet fasteners. The
monitor module has a hinged front panel for mounting displays
L N or a blank protective faceplate.
TB1
3-BPS/M-230-E Booster Power Supply and 3-BBC/M-230-E
Booster/Charger Supply
The 3-BPS/M-230-E and 3-BBC/M-230-E booster power
supplies are used to provide additional power over and above
that of the 3-PPS/M-230-E. Each model is composed of a heat
sink assembly and a monitor module. The monitor module
plugs into the rail and the heat sink assembly mounts onto the
rail chassis.
Depending on the size of the cabinet, up to three booster
TB2 TB3
power supplies can be added to make a total of 28 amps
AUX ILI ARY P OW ER
1 2
L N L N available for both internal and external applications. Each

TB1
P2
booster supply provides filtered, regulated power to the rail

chassis modules as well as 24 Vdc for operating ancillary
Heat sink Monitor Power distribution equipment.
assembly module assembly
A 3-BPS/M-230-E supply can share a common set of standby
batteries with the 3-PPS/M-230-E or 3-BBC/M-230-E. Each 3-
This installation sheet applies to the following models: BPS/M-230-E supervises its own battery connection but does
not have any battery charging capability. The 3-BBC/M-230-E
• 3-PPS/M-230-E Primary Power Supply
is capable of charging standby batteries.
• 3-BPS/M-230-E Booster Power Supply
• 3-BBC/M-230-E Booster/Charger Supply Each booster supply shares the panel's 24 Vdc electrical load
with the 3-PPS/M-230-E. In the event of a booster power
3-PPS/M-230-E Primary Power Supply
supply failure, a trouble is annunciated, and the panel load is
The 3-PPS/M-230-E Primary Power Supply provides the distributed among the remaining operational power sources.
required power and related supervision functions for the control Should the load ever exceed the ability of the operable power
panel. The 3-PPS/M-230-E comprises a heat sink assembly, a sources to supply the power, as in the event of an alarm, the
monitor module, and a power distribution assembly. The system automatically switches to standby batteries.
monitor module plugs into the rail, and the heat sink and power
The booster supply monitor module provides the interface
distribution assemblies mount onto the rail chassis.
between the booster power supply and the panel, making the
The 3-PPS/M-230-E provides filtered, regulated power to the required data and power connections to and from the rail
rail chassis modules as well as 24 Vdc for operating ancillary chassis. The monitor module requires one rail space and is
equipment. AC power and battery connections are made to secured to the assembly using snap rivet fasteners. The
fixed terminals on the heat sink assembly, away from the monitor module has a hinged front panel for mounting displays
panel's power limited wiring. or a blank protective faceplate.
The 3-PPS/M-230-E provides a dual rate constant current
battery charger circuit with automatic temperature Specifications
compensation. To prevent memory problems and total battery 3-PPS/M-230-E, 3-BPS/M-230-E, and 3-BBC/M-230-E
discharge, a battery monitor circuit supervises the standby
batteries and disconnects them when they reach the low Installation
battery threshold. Power distribution assembly: Mounts onto the rail chassis
(3-PPS/M-230-E only)
The 3-PPS/M-230-E checks the AC input source and
Heat sink assembly: Mounts onto the rail chassis
automatically switches to battery power in the event of a Monitor module: Mounts in one rail space
brownout or loss of AC power. In the event of a failure of one
or more booster power supplies, the 3-PPS/M-230-E Power input: 230 Vac, +10%, -15%, 2.0 A, 50 Hz
determines its ability, along with the surviving booster supplies,
to supply the load. If the load exceeds the ability of the primary Brownout level: < 188 Vac
and surviving booster supplies to meet the demand, the 3- Outputs
PPS/M-230-E automatically switches in the standby batteries. Total: 24 Vdc at 7.0 A (internal and auxiliary outputs)
The 3-PPS/M-230-E also switches in the standby batteries if Internal DC: 24 Vdc at 7.0 A, max.
an overload causes the heat sink temperature to reach a high Auxiliary DC: Two 24 Vdc at 3.5 A max. Power-limited and
level. supervised for ground faults and shorts.
The power supply monitor module provides the interface Termination
between the 3-PPS/M-230-E and the panel, making the AC Input: Terminals on heat sink assembly
required data and power connections to and from the rail Batteries: Terminals on heat sink assembly

Power Supplies 1/5
Internal DC output: LRM chassis rails via monitor module
Auxiliary DC output: Removable plug-in terminal strips on 6-32 x 3/4 threaded standoff
monitor module (2 places) Additional mounting space
3-PPS/M-230-E: Included with CPU current requirements
3-BPS/M-230-E: Alarm: 50 mA
Standby: 50 mA
3-BBC/M-230-E: Alarm: 70 mA
J9
J8
J11
Standby: 70 mA
J10
Temperature: 23 to 104 F (-5 to 40 C)
Humidity: 0 to 93% RH noncondensing
3-PPS/M-230-E and 3-BBC/M-230-E
Battery charging
Capacity: 10 to 65 Ah
P2
Type: Temperature compensated dual rate (1.5 amps and
3.0 amps)
Supervision #8-32 lock nut
Low AC 6-32 x 1/2 pan head screw (4 places)
Low battery: < 22.5 Vdc #6 lock washer
High battery #6 flat washer
Discharged battery: < 18 Vdc (2 places)
Ground fault: < 10 k
Figure 1: Heat sink assembly installation
3-BPS/M-230-E only
Supervision Installing a power distribution assembly
Low AC Installing a power distribution assembly is required only when
Low Battery: < 22.5 Vdc installing a 3-PPS/M-230-E.
Ground Fault: < 10 k
The power distribution assembly is installed on the rail chassis
behind the rail module connectors to the right of the primary
Installation instructions power supply heat sink assembly. Refer to Figure 2.
Installing a heat sink assembly To install a power distribution assembly:
Heat sink assemblies are installed on the rail chassis behind
1. Attach the power distribution assembly to the six threaded
the rail module connectors. Refer to Figure 1.
standoffs on the rail chassis.
To install a heat sink assembly:
2. Attach the earth ground braid to the backbox ground stud
1. Attach the heat sink assembly to the four threaded located just above the power distribution assembly (see
mounting studs on the rail chassis using lock nuts Figure 3).
provided in the hardware kit.
2. Secure the bottom edge of the heat sink assembly to the Earth ground stud
threaded standoffs on the rail chassis using screws on enclosure backbox
provided in the hardware kit. 6-32 x 3/8 pan head screw
#6 internal tooth washer Earth ground braid
3. Secure the top edge of the heat sink assembly to the rail (6 places)
chassis using the two threaded standoffs provided in the
L N
hardware kit. TB1
4. Attach the AC terminal block cover to the threaded

standoffs using two 6-32 x 1/2 pan head screws.
Notes
• Always mount the heat sink assembly for the primary
power supply onto the rail chassis closest to the top of the
cabinet backbox
• Booster supplies, if installed, can be mounted on any rail
chassis, but no more than three booster supplies may be TB2 TB3
installed in the same enclosure L N L N
Figure 2: Power distribution assembly installation (rails

removed for clarity)

2/5 Power Supplies
Earth ground stud
on enclosure backbox
Mains
earth conductor
Stud next to TB1 on the

power distribution assembly
P6
Earth ground braid

J4
P3
P2
Cable harness
To filter 2 (P/N 250187)
To filter 1
Figure 3: Earth to chassis ground connection
Installing a monitor module

Caution: This product contains components that are sensitive Ribbon cable
to static electricity. Failure to follow proper handling procedures P/N 250189 (primary monitor module)
will result in equipment damage. P/N 250188 (booster monitor module)
Tip: To make installation easier, wire the power distribution

assembly to the heat sink assemblies before installing the Figure 4: Power supply to monitor module cable connections
monitor modules.
To install a monitor module: Wiring instructions
1. Plug the cable harness and ribbon cable into the monitor All wiring must be made in accordance with national electrical
module as shown in Figure 4. Ensure the cable codes and all other local requirements.
connections are secure. Mains power wiring
2. For a power supply monitor module, align the module to Connect the mains power wiring after all power supplies have
the guide posts on slot 3 of the rail chassis. been installed. No more than one primary power supply and
For a booster supply monitor module, align the module to three booster supplies may be connected to a single mains AC
the guide posts on slot 3 or slot 5 of the rail chassis, circuit. All mains power wiring must be double insulated.
whichever is closest to the heat sink assembly.
3. Route the cable harness over and behind the bottom rail WARNING: High voltage levels capable of causing injury or
and connect it to P2 on the heat sink assembly. Push in death may be present. Precautionary measures must be taken
until the connector clicks. to ensure that the mains power is de-energized and prevented
from being inadvertently switched on.
4. Route the ribbon cable under the bottom rail and connect
it to P3 on the heat sink assembly.
To connect the mains power wiring:
5. Plug the module into the rail connectors and lock it into
place using the snap rivet fasteners. 1. Remove the power supply cover on each power supply
heat sink assembly.
6. Apply a Kapton label over the rail communication LEDs.
Kapton labels are included in the cabinet hardware kit and 1. Connect the filtered Line, Neutral, and Earth conductors
are required on every rail module installed in the cabinet. from the power distribution assembly to TB1 on each heat
sink assembly as shown in Figure 5. Ensure a secure
mechanical connection to earth ground.
2. Replace each power supply cover.
3. Ensure that the mains AC circuit is de-energized.
4. Connect the mains AC conductors from the dedicated
mains distribution circuit to TB1 on the power distribution
assembly.

Power Supplies 3/5
Earth
Line Dedicated mains
power distribution circuit
Neutral
L N
TB1
Earth ground stud on the bottom
edge of the power distribution assembly
To primary power
supply TB1-E
To booster power To booster power

supply 1 TB1-E supply 3 TB1-E
To booster power
supply 2 TB1-E
L N L N
TB2 TB3
TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1
E N L E N L E N L E N L
230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC
Primary power supply Booster power supply 1 Booster power supply 2 Booster power supply 3
(optional) (optional) (optional)
Figure 5: Mains power wiring

4/5 Power Supplies
• If an external battery cabinet is used to house standby
Auxiliary 24 Vdc riser wiring batteries, the cabinet must be installed within one meter
Connect the 24 Vdc auxiliary power riser conductors to TB1 on and in the same room as the control panel. The 3-PPS/M-
the power supply monitor module as shown in Figure 6. 230-E must be connected to the temperature sensing
circuit on a 3-BATSEN-E.
Note: Current loads must be evenly distributed across all
power supplies.
TB2
TB1
AUXILIARY POWER
1 2
BATTERY TEMP
MON
AUXILIARY POWER
1 2
TB2
TB1 To TEMP MON connection

on 3-BATSEN-E
(3-PPS/M-230-E only)
24 Vdc
0 Vdc To plus and minus terminals
24 Vdc on cabinet battery or to plus and
minus terminals on power
0 Vdc
distribution bus in remote cabinet
Figure 6: 24 Vdc riser wire connections

Figure 7: Standby battery wire connections
Standby battery wiring
Connect the standby batteries to TB2 on the heat sink Table 1 lists typical battery and power supply combinations.
assembly as shown in Figure 7 and according to the following
requirements: Table 1: Typical battery and power supply combinations
• Each set (pair) of batteries must be connected to a Total Power supplies Battery sets
separate battery charging circuit, either on a 3-PPS/M- current required required
230-E or on a 3-BBC/M-230-E
7A 1 (3-PPS/M-230-E) 1 set, 65 Ah max.
• Each power supply must be connected to only one set of
batteries. A 3-PPS/M-230-E and a 3-BPS/M-230-E can be 1 (3-PPS/M-230-E)
1 set, 65 Ah max.
wired to the same set of batteries, as well as a 3-BBC/M- 1 (3-BPS/M-230-E)
14 A
230-E and a 3-BPS/M-230-E, but never a 3-PPS/M-230-E 1 (3-PPS/M-230-E)
and a 3-BBC/M-230-E. 2 sets, 65 Ah max
1 (3-BBC/M-230-E)
• Each power supply must have its own separate pair of 1 (3-PPS/M-230-E)
wires connecting it to a set of standby batteries. Daisy 1 set, 65 Ah max.
2 (3-BPS/M-230-E)
chaining battery connections from power supply to power 21 A
supply is not allowed. 1 (3-PPS/M-230-E)
3 sets, 65 Ah max
2 (3-BBC/M-230-E)
• All battery wiring must be the same length and wire gauge
1 (3-PPS/M-230-E)
• All batteries connected to the same control panel must 1 set, 65 Ah max.
3 (3-BPS/M-230-E)
have the same ampere-hour rating, be from the same 28 A
manufacturer, and have the same manufacturing date 1 (3-PPS/M-230-E)
code 4 sets, 65 Ah max
3 (3-BBC/M-230-E)
• Batteries greater than 17 Ah and any additional batteries
must be installed in an external battery cabinet

Power Supplies 5/5
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS
The RACCR is a red, surface mount wallbox that houses
an auxiliary power supply, up to two audio amplifiers, and
up to two 10 Ah batteries. Top View
Side View
WIRE ROUTING
Auxiliary Power Supply
21.0 in Front View

(53.3 cm)
Audio Amplifier
Audio Amplifier
16.2 in
Battery space (41.15 cm)
Shading represents areas that permit nonpower-limited wiring.

3.45 in (8.76cm)
Notes
Bottom View
1 Run the AC power only through the top left
knockouts.
PRODUCT DIAGRAM
Route battery wiring to the power supply through
2
a protective channel. Wiring must stay within this
area, and must remain 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
power-limited wiring.
3 See the appropriate module installation sheets
for detailed mounting and wiring instructions.
4 All conduit knockouts support 1/2 or 3/4 inch (1.3

or 1.9 cm) conduit.
INSTALLATION
Mount the wallbox
INSTALLATION SHEET:
RACCR
Remote Audio Closet Cabinet (Red)
REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: J. Massing
DATE: 30MAR00 CREATED BY: B. Graham

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
CABINET DIMENSIONS
6.12 in
(15.55 cm)
2.75 in 2.75 in
(6.99 cm) (6.99 cm)
0.46 in (1.17 cm)
7.60 in 7.60 in
(19.31 cm) (19.31 cm)
TOP TOP
Earth ground stud located Earth ground stud located

on inside upper left corner on inside upper left corner
next to knockout next to knockout
12.95 in 12.07 in 12.95 in

(32.9 cm) (30.66 cm) (32.9 cm)
RCLM/B-S RCLM/B
Notes
1. Make sure that the wallbox is level and at the
proper height and location before securing. Use
fasteners of acceptable size and type.
2. All wiring shall be power-limited.
PRODUCT INFORMATION INSTALLATION SHEET
RLCM/B(-S)
The RLCM/B(-S) Remote Annunciator Cabinet wallbox Remote Annunciator Cabinet
houses the electronics for the 3-LCDANN(-E) Remote
LCD Command Module Annunciator. The RLCM/B is Wallbox
used in semi-flush mount applications. The RLCM/B-S
is used for surface mountings. INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387559 FILE NAME: 387559.CDR
DATE: 08DEC99 CREATED BY: G. Sutton

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
Signature Controller Module and
Signature Data Circuit Card
Product description Warnings

This product contains components that are sensitive to static
electricity. Failure to follow proper handling procedures may
B B S A A SP B B
H
Rail modules may not be plugged into the rail chassis

MW
KR
LOOP1 LOOP1 1 LOOP1
Signature Data
Circuit Card assembly while voltages are present on the rail. Failure to de-
energize the panel before plugging in the rail module may
OUTPUT MODULE
Specifications
Installation: 1 LRM space on rail chassis
Module configuration
3-SSDC1: 1 Signature Data Circuit Card
3-SDDC1: 2 Signature Data Circuit Cards
Smoke power: 24 Vdc @ 85 mA
Maximum wire size: 12 AWG (1.5 sq mm)
Signature Controller Termination: Removable plug-in terminal strips on module
LOOP2
B B
2
SP
LOOP2
MW A A S
LOOP2
B B
Module Circuit configuration: Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 6)
Circuit capacity: 125 Signature Series detectors and 125
KR H
Signature Series modules per circuit

Circuit resistance: 100 with 250 devices
Circuit capacitance: 0.33 F, max
The Signature Controller Module provides two Class A or Standby current including a full loop of devices
Class B Signature data circuits for Signature Series detectors 3-SSDC1: 139 mA
and modules. The module also provides a connection for 3-SDDC1: 256 mA
powering conventional 2-wire smoke detector circuits on Alarm current including a full loop of devices
Signature Series modules. 3-SSDC1: 158 mA
3-SDDC1: 294 mA
The Signature Controller Module supports the full complement Operating environment
of Signature diagnostic features including mapping. The Temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
module features a hinged front panel for mounting displays or Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing
a blank protective faceplate.
All field wiring connections are made via plug-in connectors
that permit termination of field wiring without the module Installation instructions
installed in the enclosure. The plug-in connectors and snap
rivet mounting also facilitate rapid troubleshooting without the 1. Connect the Signature Data Circuit Cards to the
use of tools. appropriate connectors on the backside of the rail module
assembly. See Figure 1.
Model numbers Product name
2. If a control/display module is required, install it at this time.
3-SSDC1, 3-SDDC1, Signature Controller Module Refer to the instructions provided with the control/display
3-SSDC1-MB module.
3-SDC1 Signature Data Circuit Card 3. Install the module on the rail.
The SDDC module provides all the features of the SSDC plus 4. Before connecting the field wiring, test the field wiring for
support for a second Signature data circuit. opens or shorts.
Note: Adding a second Signature Data Card to an SSDC When a circuit checks out properly, connect it to the
converts the SSDC into an SDDC and requires that you appropriate terminals as shown in Figure 2. Polarity is
redefine it as such in the project database. indicated for normal monitoring of the circuit's electrical
integrity.

Signature Controller Module and Signature Data Circuit Card 1/2
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
3-SDC1 card for

circuit 2
CIRCUIT 2
CIRCUIT 1
3-SDC1 card for

circuit 1 3-SDC1 card installation (top view)
Figure 1: 3-SDC1 card installation
Wiring diagram
3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 3-SDDC1 only
Circuit 2
LOOP2 S P LOOP2 LOOP2
MW
B B KR A A S B B
2 H
[2] Required for Class A only

To 2-wire smoke detector circuit
To 2-wire smoke detector circuit
Required for Class A only [2]
B B S A A SP B B
H MW
LOOP1 LOOP1 K1R LOOP1
Circuit 1
Notes
1. All wiring supervised and power-limited
[2] Shield, if used, must be continuous and free from earth ground
Figure 2: Wiring the 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1
P/N: 3100584 REV: 2.0 21OCT04 Installation Sheet

2/2 Signature Controller Module and Signature Data Circuit Card

EST3 Installation Sheets-2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EST3 Installation Sheets-2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EST3

P/N 3100051 • Rev 5.0 • 23MAR05

Installation sheet title P/N

EST3 Installation Sheets i

Installation sheet title P/N

ii EST3 Installation Sheets

About this manual

The EST3 library

EST3 Installation Sheets iii

additional applications information on the Signature series

iv EST3 Installation Sheets

Product description Installation instructions

1. Make wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagrams.

Housing: White, high impact polymer

[1] From listed power limited source.

Installation Sheet 26OCT01 P/N: 3100284 REV: 1.0

Product description Specifications

Installation Sheet 24JUL03 P/N: 3100585 REV: 1.0

Snap rivet installation

Figure 1: LIM card installation

[2] Required for Class A only

Figure 2: Wiring the AADC

P/N: 3100585 REV: 1.0 24JUL03 Installation Sheet

in an enclosure. The 3-ANNCPU1 processes all control

supervises all modules installed in the annunciator, and

6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East

Product description Specifications

and supervises all bus traffic between modules in the cabinet. G 2 N 2 N + - + -

Installation Sheet 25JUL03 P/N: 3100650 REV: 1.0

1. Remove the top module retainer bracket (see figure below).

P/N: 3100650 REV: 1.0 25JUL03 Installation Sheet

3. Connect the display ribbon cable (P/N 250186) from TX RX

2. Place the 3-ANNSM modules in the lower retainer

bracket (5) next to the 3-ANNCPU. Install 3-ANNBF

4. Install the ribbon cables (4) between modules from P3

Product description Termination

Controls and indicators

Installation Sheet 19AUG04 P/N: 270482 REV: 3.0

Mounting studs for ASU cover assembly

2. Secure the ASU board to the designated stand-offs in the ASU

Use #6-32 x 3/8

ASU cover assembly

3. Connect the ribbon cable (P/N 250195-01) from J1 on the

P/N: 270482 REV: 3.0 19AUG04 Installation Sheet

Rail Chassis Interface Card (RCIC) cabling instructions

From previous CHAS-7 J11 BOUT

J5 J7 To next CHAS-7 J9 BIN

To next CHAS-7 J9 DIN

RCIC Cable/Connector Guide

Installation Sheet 19AUG04 P/N: 270482 REV: 3.0

To next CHAS-7 J9 BIN

To next CHAS-7 J8 AIN

To next CHAS-7 J9 DIN

RCIC Cable/Connector Guide

P/N: 270482 REV: 3.0 19AUG04 Installation Sheet

Product description Auxiliary input

Installation Sheet 19AUG04 P/N: 270481 REV: 3.0

Caution: This equipment contains components that are

the holes indicated by the arrows in the figure below.)

5. If used, install the 3-ASUMX memory card in connector J4

P/N: 270481 REV: 3.0 19AUG04 Installation Sheet

2. Connect the ribbon cable from the ASU cover assembly to

Cover mounting diagram

Cover mounting diagram